[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2015165006A1 - Handover processing method and apparatus - Google Patents

Handover processing method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015165006A1
WO2015165006A1 PCT/CN2014/076379 CN2014076379W WO2015165006A1 WO 2015165006 A1 WO2015165006 A1 WO 2015165006A1 CN 2014076379 W CN2014076379 W CN 2014076379W WO 2015165006 A1 WO2015165006 A1 WO 2015165006A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
handover
access point
message
target access
gateway
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2014/076379
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘海
朱文若
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN201480000689.6A priority Critical patent/CN105557024A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2014/076379 priority patent/WO2015165006A1/en
Publication of WO2015165006A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015165006A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/14Reselecting a network or an air interface
    • H04W36/142Reselecting a network or an air interface over the same radio air interface technology
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/14Reselecting a network or an air interface
    • H04W36/144Reselecting a network or an air interface over a different radio air interface technology
    • H04W36/1446Reselecting a network or an air interface over a different radio air interface technology wherein at least one of the networks is unlicensed

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to communication technologies, and in particular, to a handover processing method and apparatus. Background technique
  • wireless local area network in wireless network technology is characterized by high mobility, strong confidentiality, good anti-interference, easy installation and maintenance, and low construction cost. Combining it with a mature and widely used wireless cellular network, that is, the convergence of WLAN and wireless cellular networks has become the mainstream technology.
  • Switching between existing WLANs and wireless cellular networks includes: switching from a wireless cellular network to a WLAN, and switching the WLAN to a wireless cellular network.
  • the method for the wireless cellular network to switch to the WLAN is as follows: The user equipment (User Equipment, UE for short) disconnects from the wireless cellular network and establishes a connection with the WLAN. After the UE establishes a connection with the WLAN, the UE performs authentication authentication with the authentication, authorization, and accounting server (Authentication, Authorization Accounting server, Jane AAA server or 3A server), and performs temporary key with the WLAN network.
  • the UE can transmit data on the WLAN.
  • the method for the WLAN to switch to the wireless cellular network is as follows: The UE first disconnects from the WLAN and then establishes a connection with the wireless cellular network. After the UE establishes a connection with the wireless cellular network, the UE performs authentication and key agreement with the 3A server, and after the negotiation is completed, the UE can perform data transmission on the wireless cellular network.
  • the embodiment of the invention provides a method and a device for processing a handover, which effectively solves the problem of service interruption and long handover time in the network handover process in the prior art, so that the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and shortens the network. Switching time of switching.
  • a first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including: receiving, by a user equipment, a handover command sent by a base station, where the handover command includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the UE opens a wireless local area network WLAN to access a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point;
  • the UE sends a reconnect message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point to complete the handover.
  • a second aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the first gateway receives the handover message, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the resource to the base station And switching the response message, so that the base station sends the handover command to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network WLAN to access the handover command according to the handover command. Determining a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sending a reconnect message to the target access point, and performing authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
  • the method further includes: the first gateway receiving the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the UE And sending an indication message, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
  • a third aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the mobility management entity MME receives the handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the gateway performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing
  • the MME After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the MME sends a handover response message to the base station according to the authentication protocol success message, so that the base station sends the handover response message according to the handover response message.
  • the UE sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point, so that the UE opens the WLAN access to the target access point, and sends a re-establishment message to complete the handover.
  • a fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME sends the handover response message to the user equipment according to the handover response message.
  • the UE sends a NAS message to trigger the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • the method further includes: the first gateway receiving the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the UE And sending an indication message, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
  • a fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the base station sends a handover message to the first gateway, where the handover message includes a name BSSID of the target access point, for the first gateway to use the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover message.
  • the base station receives the handover response message sent by the first gateway, and sends a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to authenticate with the target access point.
  • RRC radio resource control protocol
  • the base station After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the base station sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, for the UE
  • the wireless local area network WLAN is turned on to access the target access point, and a reestablishment message is sent to complete the handover.
  • a sixth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: Name BSSID;
  • the first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover response message to the user equipment according to the handover response message.
  • the UE sends a radio resource control protocol (RRC) message to trigger the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • RRC radio resource control protocol
  • the method further includes: the first gateway receiving the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the UE And sending an indication message, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
  • a seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the user equipment UE sends a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the UE opens a wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • An eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the mobility management entity MME receives the handover message sent by the user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • a ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the first gateway reserves a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point. And sending a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment UE, where the UE performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point. And opening the WLAN access target access point, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • a tenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the user equipment sends a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report;
  • An eleventh embodiment of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the MME receives the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access. Go to the target base station, and perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station; the MME receives the handover complete message sent by the UE, and sends a bearer modification message to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the MME, a context setup message carrying the reservation identifier to the target base station, to enable the target base station Obtain reserved resources;
  • the MME sends an attach accept message to the UE to complete the network handover.
  • a twelfth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
  • the first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the user equipment UE, and acquires the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report;
  • the first gateway receives the handover response message sent by the MME, and sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station to complete the network handover.
  • a thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, And a method for receiving a handover command sent by the base station, where the handover command includes: a name of the target access point
  • An access module configured to: according to the switching command, open a wireless local area network (WLAN) to access a target access point corresponding to a BSSID of the target access point;
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a reconnection message to the target access point, and perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point to implement handover completion.
  • a fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message, where the handover message includes: a name of a target access point BSSID;
  • a processing module configured to reserve a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover command according to the handover response message
  • the base station sends the handover command according to the handover response message
  • the point sends a reconnection message, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
  • the method further includes: the transceiver module is further configured to receive, by the target access point, authentication and encryption with the UE The indication message sent after the key negotiation process, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
  • a fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of a target access point;
  • An acquiring module configured to acquire, according to a BSSID of the target access point, a first gateway, and send, by using the transceiver module, the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway is in the target Reserve resources on the access point;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and send a non-access stratum NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform with the first gateway.
  • Authentication authentication and key agreement processing
  • the transceiver module is further configured to: after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, send a handover response message to the base station according to the authentication protocol success message, so that the base station according to the handover response message Transmitting, to the UE, a BSSID carrying the target access point And changing a command, for the UE to open the WLAN access to the target access point, and sending a reconstruction message to complete the handover.
  • a sixteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name of a target access point BSSID;
  • a processing module configured to reserve a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the MME by using the transceiver module, so that the MME responds according to the handover
  • the message is sent to the user equipment UE to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • the method further includes: the transceiver module is further configured to receive, by the target access point, authentication and encryption with the UE The indication message sent after the key negotiation process, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
  • a seventeenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to send a handover message, where the handover message includes a name BSSID of a target access point, where the first gateway is configured according to the Switching a message, reserving resources on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message sent by the first gateway, and send a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and the target access Point for authentication and key negotiation processing;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to: after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, send a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, to The UE is enabled to open a wireless local area network (WLAN) to access the target access point, and send a reconstruction message to complete the handover.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • An eighteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of a target access point;
  • a processing module configured to reserve a resource on a target access point corresponding to a BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the base station by using the transceiver module, so that the base station responds according to the handover a message, sending a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE, to The UE is triggered to perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway.
  • the method further includes: the transceiver module is further configured to receive, by the target access point, authentication and encryption with the UE The indication message sent after the key negotiation process, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
  • a nineteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to send a handover message to a mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message returned by the MME;
  • a processing module configured to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message
  • the access module is configured to open a wireless local area network (WLAN) access target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point by using the transceiver module to complete the handover.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • a twentieth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of a target access point;
  • An acquiring module configured to acquire, according to a BSSID of the target access point, a first gateway, and send, by using the transceiver module, the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway is in the target Reserve resources on the access point;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and send the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication and authentication. Key negotiation processing, and opening a wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • a twenty-first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name of a target access point BSSID;
  • a processing module configured to reserve a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment a UE, configured to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing on the UE and the target access point, and open a WLAN access target access point, and send a re-send to the target access point. Connect the message to complete the switch.
  • a twenty-second aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a processing device for switching, including: a transceiver module, configured to send a measurement report to a first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the UE according to the measurement report.
  • a processing device for switching including: a transceiver module, configured to send a measurement report to a first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the UE according to the measurement report.
  • Target base station configured to send a measurement report to a first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the UE according to the measurement report.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover command sent by the first gateway;
  • An access module configured to: open an LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station by using the transceiver module;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send, by the UE, a negotiation completion message to the mobility management entity MME, to implement handover completion.
  • a twenty-third aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a first gateway;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a reserved resource message to the target base station, so that the target base station performs reserved resources, and returns a reserved identifier.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and send a handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, for the UE Turning on LTE access to the target base station, and performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover complete message sent by the UE, and send a bearer modification message to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to:
  • An attach accept message is sent to the UE to complete the network handover.
  • a twenty-fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a measurement report sent by a user equipment UE, and acquire, according to the measurement report, a target base station that is finally accessed by the UE;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity MME.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message sent by the MME, and send a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station to complete the network. Network switching.
  • the method and device for processing the handover provided by the embodiment of the present invention, in the process of network handover, by performing the authentication authentication and the key agreement processing in advance before the network handover is completed, compared with the prior art, the access is new. After the network, the authentication and the key negotiation are performed, and the resources required by the user equipment are reserved at the access point, which effectively solves the problem of service interruption and long switching time in the network switching process in the prior art. The UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, which shortens the switching time of the network handover.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a processing method based on handover of the present invention
  • Embodiment 1 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention
  • Embodiment 3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention
  • Embodiment 4 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 5 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 8 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 8 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of Embodiment 9 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 10 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 10 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of Embodiment 11 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 12 is a flowchart of Embodiment 12 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 15 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 14 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of Embodiment 16 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart of Embodiment 17 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 18 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 19 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 19 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 2 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 3 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 4 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 5 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 7 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 1 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention
  • Embodiment 9 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 10 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • Figure 31 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 11 of the processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • Embodiment 12 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 12 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of a first gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • 35 is a schematic structural diagram of an MME according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 38 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention.
  • 39 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 40 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a MME according to the present invention.
  • 41 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an MME according to the present invention.
  • Figure 44 is a schematic structural view of a fourth embodiment of the first gateway of the present invention. detailed description
  • the network architecture includes: User Equipment (UE), an Access Point (AP) connected to the UE, and a Trusted WLAN Access Gateway (TWAG) connected to the access point. ), and a signaling gateway (referred to as SGW) or a PDN Gate Way (PGW) connected to the TWAG.
  • the TWAG is the first hop router of the UE, and the IP address of the UE is sent by the PGW to the TWAG, and the UE obtains the IP address from the TWAG through an IP address allocation protocol such as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). .
  • DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
  • PDP Packet Data Protocol
  • the network architecture also includes: Policy and charging rules functional unit (Policy and
  • PCRF Charging Rules Function
  • HSS server HSS server
  • trusted WLAN network trusted WLAN network
  • 3A server 3GPP network.
  • the processing method embodiments of the handover provided by the present invention are all based on the architecture shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a first embodiment of a method for processing handover according to the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail. Solution, as shown in Figure 2, the method includes:
  • S201 The UE receives a handover command sent by the base station, where the handover command includes: a BSSID of the target access point.
  • the base station is a serving base station of the cellular network currently accessed by the UE.
  • the base station detects that the currently trusted WLAN network can access, the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE completes the handover and access.
  • the WLAN is a serving base station of the cellular network currently accessed by the UE.
  • S202 The UE opens a WLAN access target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover command.
  • the target access point is an access point corresponding to the BSSID carried in the handover command, that is, an access point of the WLAN to be accessed after the UE is switched.
  • S203 The UE sends a reconnect message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point to complete the handover.
  • the authentication and negotiation processing with the target access point is triggered.
  • the handover initiation process may be initiated by the UE to complete the network handover, or the target gateway may perform bearer modification, so that the PGW will use the UE.
  • the bearer switches to the first gateway, and the UE can communicate on the switched WLAN network.
  • the base station sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE accesses the target access point to perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing, and finally the UE or the target gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE
  • the communication can be performed on the WLAN, and the authentication authentication and the key agreement processing are performed in advance before the network handover is completed.
  • the embodiment is The method provided shortens the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the second embodiment of the processing method of the handover according to the network architecture of the present invention.
  • the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail.
  • Solution as shown in Figure 3, the method includes:
  • the first gateway receives a handover message, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
  • the first gateway is a target gateway to be accessed after the UE is switched, and the first gateway may be configured by the MME to query the correspondence between the target AP and the target gateway stored in the background, or may be accessed by the MME according to the MME.
  • the mapping between the AP and the neighboring gateway is configured and obtained.
  • the first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover command according to the handover response message.
  • the UE is configured to enable the UE to access a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point in the handover command according to the handover command, and send a reconnection to the target access point. a message, and performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
  • the reserved resource on the target access point includes the UE that needs to be reserved according to the UE's Voice over IP (VOIP) and the UE's MAC address reserved by the target access point.
  • VOIP Voice over IP
  • the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource is reserved for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission.
  • the first gateway can be controlled by a Wireless Access Point Control Specification (Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol Specification, Jane
  • CAPWAP Notifies the access point to reserve resources.
  • the first gateway receives an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover. .
  • the first gateway performing the bearer modification may send the modified response to the PGW. So that the PGW can switch the UE bearer to the first gateway, and the UE can communicate on the switched WLAN network.
  • the first gateway receives the handover command, and reserves resources on the target access point, and the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE accesses the target access point, and performs authentication.
  • the authentication and key negotiation process, the UE or the target gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN, compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art.
  • the data communication cannot be performed.
  • the method provided in this embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the service is not interrupted during the network handover process, and the authentication and key negotiation processing is performed before the network handover is completed. Shorten the switching time from cellular to WLAN.
  • FIG. 4 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a third embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example.
  • the technical solution, as shown in Figure 4, the specific process of the method is:
  • the base station sends a handover message to the MME, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
  • S402 The MME selects the first gateway according to the BSSID, and sends a handover message to the first gateway.
  • the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE.
  • S403 The first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID.
  • the reserved resource on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE.
  • the UE performs voice or video data transmission.
  • the first gateway sends a handover response message to the base station by using the MME.
  • S405 The base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command carries the BSSID of the target access point.
  • S406 The UE turns on the WLAN to access the target access point.
  • S407 The UE sends a reconnect message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
  • S408 The UE initiates a handover attach procedure or the first gateway performs bearer modification processing.
  • S409 The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
  • the base station sends a handover message to the MME, selects the first gateway according to the handover message, and sends a handover command to the first gateway, where the first gateway is configured according to the
  • the handover command reserves resources on the target access point, and returns a handover response message to the base station by using the MME, and the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE accesses the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing.
  • the UE or the target gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art.
  • the method provided by the embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the service is not interrupted during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed before the network handover is completed, and the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened. Switch time.
  • FIG. 5 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example. The technical solution, as shown in Figure 5, the specific process of the method is:
  • the base station selects the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover command to the first gateway.
  • the handover command includes a BSSID of the target access point.
  • the VOIP indication and the MAC address of the UE may also be included.
  • the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID.
  • the reserved resource on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE.
  • the UE performs voice or video data transmission.
  • S503 The first gateway sends a handover response message to the base station.
  • the base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command carries the BSSID of the target access point.
  • S505 The UE turns on the WLAN to access the target access point.
  • S506 The UE sends a reconnect message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
  • S507 The UE initiates a handover attach procedure or the first gateway performs bearer modification processing.
  • S508 The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
  • the base station selects the first gateway, and sends a handover command to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover command, and returns a handover response message to the base station.
  • the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE accesses the target access point, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing.
  • the UE or the target gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN.
  • the authentication and key negotiation performed cannot perform data communication.
  • the method provided in this embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement are performed.
  • the processing is performed before the network switching is completed in advance, and the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the fifth embodiment of the processing method of the handover according to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1.
  • the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail.
  • Solution, as shown in Figure 6, the method includes:
  • the MME receives a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a BSSID of the target access point.
  • the MME acquires the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. .
  • the MME obtains the first gateway by querying the correspondence between the target AP and the target gateway stored in the background, and may also configure the first gateway according to the correspondence between the access point AP and the neighboring gateway.
  • the MME receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sends a Network Attached Storage (NAS) message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and the first
  • NAS Network Attached Storage
  • the NAS message is transmitted to the UE through the base station and the MME.
  • the MME After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the MME sends a handover response message to the base station according to the authentication protocol success message, so that the base station sends the handover response message according to the handover response message.
  • the UE sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point, so that the UE opens the WLAN access to the target access point, and sends a re-establishment message to complete the handover.
  • the MME acquires the first gateway and sends a handover message to the first gateway by receiving the handover message sent by the base station, so that the first gateway reserves the target access point according to the handover command. And returning a handover response message to the MME, the MME sends a NAS message to the UE, and triggers the UE to perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway. After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the MME sends a message to the UE.
  • the base station sends a handover response message, so that the base station sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE opens the WLAN access target access point, and finally the UE or the destination
  • the standard gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art.
  • the method reserves resources on the target access point, so that the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, and shortens the cellular network to the WLAN. Switch time.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of the processing method of the handover according to the present invention.
  • the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail.
  • Solution as shown in Figure 7, the method includes:
  • the first gateway receives a handover message sent by the MME, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
  • the handover message further includes a VOIP of the UE and a MAC address of the UE.
  • the first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME sends the NAS message according to the handover response message. And triggering the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • the reserved resource of the first gateway on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP of the UE and the MAC address of the UE. And for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission. Specifically, the first gateway may notify the access point to reserve resources through the CAPWAP.
  • the first gateway receives an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover. .
  • the processing method of the handover by receiving the handover message sent by the MME, the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and returns a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME sends the NAS to the UE.
  • the message triggers the UE to perform authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway.
  • the first gateway After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the target access point, the first gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN.
  • the method provided in this embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the UE switches in the network. During the process, the service will not be interrupted, and the authentication and key agreement processing will be performed before the UE accesses the target access point. Short cell to WLAN switching time.
  • FIG. 8 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example. The technical solution, as shown in Figure 8, the specific process of the method is:
  • the base station sends a handover message to the MME, where the handover message includes the target access point.
  • S802 The MME selects the first gateway according to the BSSID, and sends a handover message to the first gateway.
  • the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE.
  • the reserved resources on the target access point include the target access point according to the UE.
  • the VOIP indication and the UE reserved for the MAC address of the UE need to reserve the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission.
  • S804 The first gateway sends a handover response message to the MME.
  • the MME sends a NAS message to the UE according to the handover response message, and triggers the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • S806 The first gateway sends an authentication protocol success message to the MME, and the MME determines that the authentication process is completed.
  • S807 The MME sends a handover response message to the base station.
  • S808 The base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command includes a BSSID of the target access point.
  • S809 The UE opens the WLAN access to the target access point, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point.
  • S810 The UE initiates a handover attach procedure or the first gateway performs bearer modification processing.
  • S811 The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
  • the MME forwards the handover message to the first gateway by using the handover message sent by the base station to the MME, and the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and sends the resource to the MME.
  • the MME sends a NAS message to the UE, and triggers the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway, after the first gateway receives the authentication protocol success message sent by the target access point, so that The PGW completes the network handover, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art.
  • the method provided in this embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that UE in the process of network switching It is not interrupted, and the authentication and key agreement processing is performed in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, and the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of the processing method of the handover according to the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail.
  • Solution as shown in Figure 9, the method includes:
  • the base station sends a handover message to the first gateway, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point, where the first gateway accesses the target corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover message. Reserve resources on the point.
  • the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE.
  • S902 The base station receives the handover response message sent by the first gateway, and sends a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and the The target access point performs authentication and key agreement processing.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the RRC message includes a BSSID of the target access point, so that the UE completes authentication and key agreement at the target access point.
  • the base station After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the base station sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, for the UE.
  • the WLAN is opened to access the target access point, and a re-establishment message is sent to complete the handover.
  • the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the handover message sent by the base station to the first gateway, so that the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and the base station receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway.
  • the UE can communicate on the WLAN, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art.
  • the method provided by the embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the service is not interrupted during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, and the cell is shortened. Network to WLAN switching time.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of Embodiment 9 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention, based on the network shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the technical solution of the embodiment is described in detail in the example that the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN. As shown in FIG. 10, the method includes:
  • the first gateway receives a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
  • the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE.
  • the first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover response message to the user equipment according to the handover response message.
  • the UE sends an RRC message to trigger the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • the first gateway receives an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover. .
  • the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the base station, and reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and returns a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the RRC to the UE. And the first gateway sends an authentication protocol success message to the base station, so that the UE sends a handover command to the UE to enable the UE to open the WLAN access to the target interface.
  • the UE can communicate on the WLAN, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art.
  • the method provided in this embodiment is on the target access point.
  • the resources are reserved, so that the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed before the UE accesses the target access point, and the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened.
  • FIG. 11 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention.
  • a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example.
  • the technical solution, as shown in Figure 11, the specific process of the method is:
  • the base station selects the first gateway according to the BSSID, and sends a handover message to the first gateway.
  • the base station may determine the first gateway by using the relationship between the target access point and the gateway corresponding to the background query BSSID, and may also obtain the first gateway according to the correspondence between the target access point and the neighboring gateway.
  • the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point, a VOIP indication, and a MAC address of the UE.
  • the first gateway reserves a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID.
  • the reserved resource on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE.
  • the UE performs voice or video data transmission.
  • S1103 The first gateway sends a handover response message to the base station.
  • the base station sends an RRC message to the UE according to the handover response message, and triggers the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • the authentication and key agreement processing can be completed by four handshakes, during which all messages are transmitted through the base station.
  • S1105 The first gateway sends an authentication protocol success message to the base station, and the base station determines that the authentication process is completed.
  • S1106 The base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command includes the target access point.
  • S1107 The UE opens the WLAN access to the target access point and sends a reconnection message to the target access point.
  • S1108 The UE initiates a handover attach procedure or the first gateway performs bearer modification processing.
  • S1109 The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
  • the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the base station, and reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and returns a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the RRC to the UE. And the first gateway sends an authentication protocol success message to the base station, where the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the WLAN access to the target access.
  • the UE can communicate on the WLAN. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art, the data communication cannot be performed.
  • the method provided in this embodiment is pre-targeted on the target access point. The resources are reserved, and the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process.
  • the authentication and key agreement processing are performed before the UE accesses the target access point, and the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of Embodiment 11 of the processing method of the handover according to the embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the UE sends a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a BSSID of the target access point.
  • the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE.
  • the BSSID of the source access point, the ID of the first gateway (IDent), and the random number SNon S e for key negotiation may also be included.
  • the UE receives the handover response message returned by the MME, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message.
  • S1203 The UE turns on the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • the reconnect message is encrypted by using the negotiated key, so that the target access point receives the UE, and instructs the first gateway to perform bearer modification to complete the network handover.
  • the UE sends a handover message to the MME, and receives a handover response message returned by the MME, and the UE performs authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway to complete authentication and key agreement.
  • the UE opens the WLAN to access the target access point, completes the network handover, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, which is compared in the prior art.
  • the authentication and key negotiation performed after entering the new network cannot perform data communication.
  • the method provided in this embodiment shortens the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a second embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the MME receives a handover message sent by the user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point.
  • the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE, and optionally, may further include a BSSID of the source access point, an identifier ID of the first gateway, and a random number used for key negotiation. SNonse.
  • the MME acquires the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. .
  • the reserved resource on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE.
  • the UE performs voice or video data transmission.
  • the MME receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sends the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication authentication and a key.
  • negotiation processing and opening a wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • the reconnect message is encrypted by using the negotiated key, so that the target access point receives the UE, and instructs the first gateway to perform bearer modification to complete the network handover.
  • the MME receives the handover message sent by the UE, and returns a handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing, and complete authentication authentication and After the key negotiation process, the UE opens the WLAN to access the target access point, completes the network handover, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, compared to the prior art.
  • the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network cannot perform data communication.
  • the method provided in this embodiment shortens the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a thirteenth embodiment of a method for processing a handover according to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1.
  • a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example.
  • Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 14, the method includes:
  • the first gateway receives a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point.
  • the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE, and optionally, may further include a BSSID of the source access point, an ID of the first gateway, and a random number SNonse for key negotiation. .
  • the first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment.
  • a UE configured to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing on the UE and the target access point, and open a WLAN access target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point to implement handover. carry out.
  • the reserved resources on the target access point include the target access point according to the UE.
  • the VOIP indication and the UE reserved for the MAC address of the UE need to reserve the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission.
  • the first gateway generates a random number ANo e, and calculates according to a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) obtained from the last attached gateway of the UE and a random number SNonse. Pairwise Transient Key (PTK), And sending the PTK to the access point to complete the key negotiation process of the UE and the access point.
  • PMK Pairwise Master Key
  • PTK Pairwise Transient Key
  • the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the first gateway, and returns a handover response message to the UE, so that the handover response message is sent to the UE, so that the UE performs the handover with the first gateway.
  • the UE opens the WLAN to access the target access point, completes the network handover, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing in advance in the UE.
  • the method provided in this embodiment shortens the cellular network to the WLAN by performing the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. Switch time.
  • FIG. 15 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to Embodiment 14 of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example, and the implementation is described in detail. The technical solution of the example, as shown in FIG. 15, the specific process of the method is:
  • the UE sends a handover message to the MME, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
  • the MME acquires the first gateway according to the BSSID.
  • the MME may determine the first gateway by querying the relationship between the target access point and the neighboring gateway in the background, or may configure the first gateway according to the correspondence between the target access point and the neighboring gateway.
  • S1503 The MME sends a handover message to the first gateway.
  • the BSSID of the target access point and the BSSID of the source access point, the random number SNonce, and the ID of the last attached gateway of the UE, and the MAC address and VOIP indication of the UE are included.
  • S1504 The first gateway performs resource reservation on the target access point.
  • the first gateway selects the last attached gateway of the UE according to the ID of the last attached gateway of the UE, and obtains the security context of the UE from the gateway, gp: PMK.
  • the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. Specifically, the first gateway notifies the target access point by using the CAPWAP protocol, and the Internet reserved by the UE according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE.
  • the authentication and key agreement processing can be completed by four handshakes, during which all messages are transmitted through the base station.
  • S1505 The first gateway sends a handover response message to the MME.
  • the handover response message includes a random number ANonce and a network to which the UE last attached.
  • the ID of the gateway which includes its IP address and MAC address.
  • S1506 The MME forwards the handover response message to the UE.
  • S1507 The UE performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point according to the handover response message.
  • the UE calculates the PTK according to the PMK, the random number ANonse, and the random number SNonse.
  • S1508 The UE opens the WLAN access target access point and sends a reconnection message to the target access point, and the message is encrypted by using PTK.
  • S1509 The target access point accepts the UE, and instructs the first gateway to perform bearer modification processing.
  • S1510 The first gateway performs bearer modification processing, and sends a modification request to the PGW.
  • S1511 The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
  • the MME sends a handover message to the MME, the MME forwards the handover message to the first gateway, and the handover response message returned by the first gateway to the MME, and the MME sends the handover response message to the UE, to
  • the UE opens the WLAN to access the target access point, completes the network handover, and the UE can communicate on the WLAN.
  • the resource is reserved on the target access point, and the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, compared with the prior art.
  • the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network cannot perform data communication.
  • the method provided in this embodiment shortens the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN, and enables the UE to not interrupt the service during the network handover process. .
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a WLAN to a cellular network as an example.
  • Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 16, the method includes:
  • S1601 The UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report.
  • the measurement report includes an identifier of a plurality of neighboring base stations, where the first gateway is a gateway to which the UE is currently connected, and the first gateway determines the correspondence between the access point and the base station stored in the background.
  • the UE receives the handover command sent by the first gateway, and opens an LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station.
  • the handover command received by the UE includes an ECGI.
  • S1603 The UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME to complete the handover.
  • the MME after receiving the negotiation completion message, the MME sends a create session message to the SGW/PGW, and establishes a message to the target base station context, so that the target base station allows the UE to access, and the MME wants the UE to send the attach and receive message.
  • the UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway by using the UE, and the first gateway acquires, according to the measurement report, a target base station to be accessed after the UE switches the network, and the first gateway sends a handover message to the MME, to And causing the MME to send the handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, the UE opens the LTE access target base station, performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station, and completes authentication authentication.
  • the UE After the key negotiation process is performed, the UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME to complete the network handover, and the authentication authentication and the key agreement processing are performed before the UE network handover is completed. Compared with the prior art, the access is new. The authentication and key negotiation performed after the network cannot perform data communication. The method provided in this embodiment shortens the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the sixteenth embodiment of the method for processing a handover according to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1.
  • the user equipment is switched from the WLAN to the cellular network as an example.
  • Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 17, the method includes:
  • S1701 The MME receives the handover message sent by the first gateway.
  • the handover message includes an ECGI and a VOIP indication.
  • S1702 The MME sends a reserved resource message to the target base station, so that the target base station performs reserved resources, and returns a reserved identifier.
  • the resource reserved by the target base station includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE, for the UE. Perform voice or video data transmission.
  • the MME receives the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access. Go to the target base station, and perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station.
  • the MME receives the handover complete message sent by the UE, and sends a bearer modification message to the SGW/PGW.
  • the MME sends, to the target base station, a context setup that carries the reservation identifier.
  • the eNB sends an attach accept message to the UE to complete the network switch.
  • the MME receives the handover message sent by the first gateway, and the MME sends a resource reservation message to the target base station to enable the target base station to perform resource reservation, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway.
  • the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE opens the LTE access target base station, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station, and after completing the authentication and key agreement processing, the UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME.
  • the UE can communicate on the cellular network, reserve resources on the target base station, and the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed in advance before the UE network handover is completed.
  • the data communication cannot be interrupted.
  • the method provided in this embodiment shortens the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN, and the UE is in the Business is not interrupted during network switching.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the seventh embodiment of the processing method of the handover according to the embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the WLAN to the cellular network as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the UE, and obtains the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report.
  • the measurement report includes an identifier of a plurality of neighboring base stations, where the first gateway is a gateway to which the UE is currently connected, and the first gateway determines the correspondence between the access point and the base station stored in the background.
  • S1802 The first gateway sends a handover message to the MME.
  • the handover message includes an ECGI and VOIP indication.
  • the first gateway receives the handover response message sent by the MME, and sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens LTE access to the target base station to complete network switching.
  • the first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the UE, and confirms the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report, and sends a handover message to the MME, where the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE.
  • the UE opens the LTE access target base station, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station. After the authentication and key agreement processing is completed, the UE sends a negotiation complete message to the MME to complete the network handover, and the UE may be in the cellular. Network communication, authentication The authentication and key negotiation process is performed before the completion of the UE network handover. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art, the method provided in this embodiment shortens the cellular network to the WLAN. The switching time, and the UE does not interrupt the service during the network switching process.
  • FIG. 19 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 18 of the processing method of the handover according to the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the implementation is described in detail. The technical solution of the example, as shown in FIG. 19, the specific process of the method is:
  • the UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway.
  • the measurement report includes identifiers of a plurality of base stations around the UE.
  • the first gateway acquires a target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report.
  • the first gateway determines, according to the correspondence between the access point and the base station stored in the background, the target base station to which the UE is to be finally accessed.
  • S1903 The first gateway sends a handover message to the MME.
  • the handover message packet expands the ECGI and VOIP indications.
  • S1904 The MME sends a resource reservation message to the target base station.
  • the target base station performs resource reservation, and returns a reservation identifier to the MME.
  • the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE according to the handover response message, where the command includes ECGIo.
  • the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station.
  • S1910 The MME sends a bearer modification message to the SGW/PGW.
  • the MME sends a context setup message carrying the reservation identifier to the target base station, so that the target base station acquires the reserved resource.
  • the target base station acquires the reserved resource according to the reserved identifier, and the admission control passes.
  • the first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the UE, and confirms the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report, and sends a handover message to the MME, and the MME sends the handover message to the target base station according to the handover message.
  • a resource reservation message the target base station performs resource reservation, and returns a reservation identifier to the MME, where the MME sends a handover response message to the first gateway, where the first network
  • the UE sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE opens the LTE access target base station, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station.
  • the UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME, and the MME sends the message to the MME.
  • the target base station sends a context setup message carrying the reservation identifier, so that the target base station acquires the reserved resource, and the MME sends an attach accept message to the UE to complete the network handover, reserve resources on the target base station, and authenticate the authentication.
  • the key negotiation process is performed before the completion of the UE network handover. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art, the method provided in this embodiment shortens the handover of the cellular network to the WLAN. Time, and the UE will not be interrupted during the network handover process.
  • FIG. 20 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 19 of the handover processing method of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the implementation is described in detail. The technical solution of the example, as shown in FIG. 20, the specific process of the method is:
  • the UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway.
  • the measurement report includes identifiers of a plurality of base stations around the UE.
  • the first gateway acquires a target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report.
  • the first gateway determines, according to the correspondence between the access point and the base station stored in the background, the target base station to which the UE is to be finally accessed.
  • S2003 The first gateway sends a handover message to the MME.
  • the handover message packet is extended by the ECGI and the VOIP indication, and further includes a transparent container of the source base station to the target base station and a UE temporary identifier that is last stored in the UE, and is used to obtain a security context from the last attached MME of the UE.
  • the MME finds the last attached MME according to the UE temporary identifier last saved in the UE and acquires a security context, that is, a PMK.
  • S2005 The MME sends a resource reservation message to the target base station according to the security context.
  • the resource reservation message triggers authentication authentication and key negotiation processing of the target base station and the UE.
  • the target base station performs resource reservation, and returns a reservation identifier to the MME.
  • S2007 The MME sends a handover response message to the first gateway.
  • the handover response message includes a transparent container from the source base station to the target base station.
  • the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE according to the handover response message, where the command includes a transparent container of the source base station to the target base station.
  • S2010 The target base station notifies the MME that the handover is completed.
  • S2011 The MME sends a bearer modification message to the SGW/PGW.
  • the SGW/PGW returns a bearer modification response message to the MME to complete the network handover.
  • the first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the UE, and confirms the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report, and sends a handover message to the MME, and the MME sends the handover message to the target base station according to the handover message.
  • the resource reservation message triggers the target base station to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs resource reservation, and returns a reservation identifier to the MME, and the MME sends a handover response message to the first gateway, where the first gateway sends the message to the UE.
  • the handover command the UE opens the LTE access target base station, and the UE sends a handover confirmation message to the target base station, the target base station notifies the MME that the handover is completed, reserves resources on the target base station, and advances the authentication authentication and the key agreement processing in the UE access network.
  • the method provided in this embodiment shortens the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN, and the UE is in the process of network handover, as compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. Business will not be interrupted.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus shown in FIG. 21 includes: a transceiver module 211 and an access module 212.
  • the transceiver module 211 is configured to receive a handover command sent by the base station, where the handover command includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and an access module 212, configured to: open the WLAN access to the wireless local area network according to the handover command
  • the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point; the transceiver module 211 is further configured to send a reconnect message to the target access point, and perform authentication and key agreement with the target access point. Processing to achieve the completion of the switch.
  • the processing device for the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the first embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 221 and a processing module 222.
  • the transceiver module 221 is configured to receive a handover message, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and a processing module 222, configured to reserve on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point.
  • sending a handover response message to the base station so that the base station sends the handover command to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network according to the handover command.
  • the WLAN accesses the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point in the handover command, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point, and performs authentication and authentication with the target access point. Key negotiation processing.
  • the transceiver module 221 is further configured to receive an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the indication message. To complete the switch.
  • the processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the second embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 231 and an acquisition module 232.
  • the transceiver module 231 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and an obtaining module 232, configured to acquire the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, And sending, by the transceiver module, the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point;
  • the transceiver module 231 is further configured to receive the a handover response message returned by the gateway, and sending a non-access stratum NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway;
  • the transceiver module 231 is further configured to: after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, send
  • the processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the fifth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 241 and a processing module 242.
  • the transceiver module 241 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and a processing module 242, configured to target the BSSID of the target access point.
  • the transceiver module 241 is further configured to receive an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification according to the indication message. Process to complete the switch.
  • the processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the sixth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 251.
  • the transceiver module 251 is configured to send a handover message, where the handover message includes a name BSSID of the target access point, where the first gateway accesses the target corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover message.
  • the receiving and receiving module 251 is further configured to receive a handover response message sent by the first gateway, and send a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the The UE performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point; the transceiver module 251 is further configured to: after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, according to the authentication protocol success message direction The UE sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point, and sends a reconstruction message to complete the handover.
  • the processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the eighth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 261 and a processing module 262.
  • the transceiver module 261 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and a processing module 262, configured to target the access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point.
  • the first gateway performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing.
  • the transceiver module 261 is further configured to receive an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification according to the indication message. Process to complete the switch.
  • the processing device for the handover provided in this embodiment corresponds to the ninth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 7 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention, as shown in FIG.
  • the device includes: a transceiver module 271, a processing module 272, and an access module 273.
  • the transceiver module 271 is configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the transceiver module 271 is further configured to receive a handover response message returned by the MME;
  • the module 272 is configured to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message, and the access module 273 is configured to open a wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and
  • the transceiver module sends a reconnect message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • the processing device for the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the eleventh embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 281 and an acquisition module 282.
  • the transceiver module 281 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and an obtaining module 282, configured to acquire, according to the BSSID of the target access point, the first a gateway, and sending, by the transceiver module, the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point;
  • the transceiver module 281 is further configured to receive the Transmitting a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and transmitting the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway, and opens a wireless local area network WLAN. Accessing the target access point and sending a reconnect message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • the processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the method embodiment 12, and the implementation manner, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 9 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing device includes: a transceiver module 291 and a processing module 292.
  • the transceiver module 291 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and a processing module 292, configured to target the BSSID of the target access point. Reserving resources on the access point, and sending a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment UE, for the UE to authenticate with the target access point.
  • the authentication and key negotiation process are performed, and the WLAN access target access point is opened, and a reconnection message is sent to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 10 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 30, the apparatus includes: a transceiver module 301 and an access module 302.
  • the transceiver module 301 is configured to send a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report, and the transceiver module 301 is further configured to receive the first a switching command sent by the gateway; the access module 302, configured to: open an LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station by using the transceiver module 301; The transceiver module 301 is further configured to send, by the UE, a negotiation completion message to the mobility management entity MME, to implement handover completion.
  • the processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the fifteenth embodiment of the method, and the implementation manner, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 11 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 311, configured to receive a handover message sent by a first gateway; And sending a reserved resource message to the target base station, so that the target base station performs the reserved resource, and returns a reserved identifier; the transceiver module 311 is further configured to receive the reserved identifier returned by the target base station, and The first gateway sends a handover response message, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station, and performs authentication and key agreement with the target base station.
  • the transceiver module 311 is further configured to receive a handover complete message sent by the UE, and send a bearer modification message to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
  • the transceiver module 311 is further configured to:
  • the processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the sixteenth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 32 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 12 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention.
  • the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 321 configured to receive a measurement report sent by the user equipment UE, and obtain a target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report; Sending a handover message to the mobility management entity MME; the transceiver module 321 is further configured to receive a handover response message sent by the MME, and send a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target Base station to complete network switching.
  • the processing device for switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the seventeenth embodiment of the method, and the implementation manner thereof The principle and effect are similar, and will not be described here.
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention.
  • the user equipment includes: a transceiver 331 and a processor 332, where the transceiver 331 is configured to receive a handover command sent by the base station.
  • the switching command includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the processor 332 is configured to: according to the switching command, turn on the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point; the transceiver 331
  • the target access point sends a reconnection message, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point to implement handover completion.
  • the user equipment in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of a first gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention, including: a transceiver 341 and a processor 342.
  • the transceiver 341 is configured to receive a handover message, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the processor 342 is configured to reserve resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and Sending a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover command to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network WLAN to access the handover according to the handover command.
  • a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point in the command and sending a reconnection message to the target access point, and performing authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
  • the transceiver 341 is further configured to receive an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the indication message, To complete the switch.
  • the first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic structural diagram of an MME according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the MME includes: a transceiver 351 and a processor 352.
  • the transceiver 351 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, where the processor 352 is configured to acquire the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and Transmitting a message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point; the transceiver 351 receives a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and according to the handover response
  • the message is sent to the user equipment UE to send a non-access stratum NAS message to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • the transceiver 351 receives the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway. After, according to the The authentication protocol success message sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the handover response message, for the UE
  • the WLAN is opened to access the target access point, and a re-establishment message is sent to complete the handover.
  • the MME of this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention.
  • the first gateway includes: a transceiver 361 and a processor 362, where the transceiver 361 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME.
  • the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the processor 362 is configured to reserve a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the MME,
  • the MME sends a NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • the transceiver 361 is further configured to receive an indication message sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the indication message, To complete the switch.
  • the first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station includes: a transceiver 371 and a processor 372, where the transceiver 371 is configured to send a handover message to the first gateway, where the handover message includes a target.
  • the transceiver 371 is configured to receive the first a handover response message sent by the gateway, and sending a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point;
  • the processor 372 After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the processor 372 sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, to The UE is enabled to open a wireless local area network (WLAN) to access the target access point, and send a reconstruction message to complete the handover.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • the base station of this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • 38 is a schematic structural diagram of a first gateway according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 38, the first gateway includes: a transceiver 381 and a processor 382, where the transceiver 381 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover is performed.
  • the message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the processor 382 is configured to reserve a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the base station, so that the The base station sends a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
  • RRC radio resource control protocol
  • the transceiver 381 receives the indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing the authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover. .
  • the first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 39 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention.
  • the user equipment includes: a transceiver 391 and a processor 392, where the transceiver 391 is configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover is performed.
  • the message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the transceiver 391 receives the handover response message returned by the MME, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message.
  • the processor 392 opens the wireless local area network WLAN access target access point and sends a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • the user equipment in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the MME includes: a transceiver 401 and a processor 402.
  • the transceiver 401 receives a handover message sent by the user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name of the access point BSSID; the processor 402 acquires the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway is in the target Receiving a resource on the access point; the transceiver 401 receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sends the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform the authentication.
  • Right authentication and key agreement processing and open the wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • the MME in this embodiment may be used to perform processing of handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention.
  • the technical solution of the method is similar to the technical effect, and will not be described here.
  • FIG. 41 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention.
  • the first gateway includes: a transceiver 411 and a processor 412, and the transceiver 411 receives a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME.
  • the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
  • the processor 412 reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment UE. And performing the authentication and key agreement processing on the UE and the target access point, and opening the WLAN access target access point, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
  • the first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first gateway includes: a transceiver 421, and the transceiver 421 sends a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway Acquiring, according to the measurement report, the target base station that the UE finally accesses; the transceiver 421 receives the handover command sent by the first gateway, and opens the LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and the The target base station performs authentication and key agreement processing; the transceiver 421 sends a negotiation completion message to the mobility management entity MME to implement handover completion.
  • the user equipment in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention.
  • the implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an MME according to the present invention.
  • the MME includes: a transceiver 431, the transceiver 431 receives a handover message sent by the first gateway; and the transceiver 431 sends a reservation to the target base station.
  • the transceiver 431 receives the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway, so that The first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station; and the transceiver 431 receives the handover sent by the UE.
  • the message is completed and a bearer modification message is sent to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
  • the transceiver 431 is further configured to send, to the target base station, a context setup message that carries the reservation identifier, so that the target base station acquires the reserved resource, and the transceiver 431 is further configured to send the identifier to the UE. Attach the accept message to complete the network switch.
  • the ⁇ of the embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
  • the first gateway includes: a transceiver 441, configured to receive a measurement report sent by the user equipment UE, and according to The measurement report acquires a target base station that the UE finally accesses; the transceiver 441 is configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity, and the transceiver 441 is configured to receive the handover response message sent by the UI, and send the handover response message to the UE. And switching a command, so that the UE turns on LTE access to the target base station to complete network switching.
  • the first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a handover processing method and apparatus. The handover processing method comprises: a UE receives a handover command sent by a base station, the handover command comprising a BSSID of a target access point; the UE opens a WLAN and accesses a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover command; and the UE sends a reconnection message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point, so as to complete the handover. A base station sends a handover command to a UE, the UE accesses a target access point and then performs authentication and key negotiation processing so as to complete network handover, so that the UE can perform communication in a WLAN, and the authentication and key negotiation processing is performed before the network handover is completed, thereby shortening the time of handover from a cellular network to the WLAN.

Description

切换的处理方法和装置  Switching processing method and device
技术领域 Technical field
本发明涉及通信技术, 尤其涉及一种切换的处理方法和装置。 背景技术  The present invention relates to communication technologies, and in particular, to a handover processing method and apparatus. Background technique
随着无线网络技术的发展, 不同无线网络接入技术的融合已成为发展趋 势。 目前, 无线网络技术中的无线局域网 (Wireless Local Area Networks, 简 称 WLAN) 由于具有移动性高、 保密性强、 抗干扰性好、 架设与维护容易、 构建成本低等特点, 因此以 WLAN为补充, 将其与技术成熟、 应用广泛的无 线蜂窝网络相结合, 即 WLAN与无线蜂窝网络的融合成为当前主流技术。  With the development of wireless network technology, the convergence of different wireless network access technologies has become a development trend. At present, wireless local area network (WLAN) in wireless network technology is characterized by high mobility, strong confidentiality, good anti-interference, easy installation and maintenance, and low construction cost. Combining it with a mature and widely used wireless cellular network, that is, the convergence of WLAN and wireless cellular networks has become the mainstream technology.
另外, 由于网络带宽资源有限, 要满足各种业务的要求, 因此, 需要在 WLAN和无线蜂窝网络之间进行切换使用。 现有的 WLAN和无线蜂窝网络 之间的切换包括: 无线蜂窝网络切换到 WLAN, 以及 WLAN切换到无线蜂 窝网络。 其中, 无线蜂窝网络切换到 WLAN 的方法为: 用户设备 (User Equipment, 简称 UE) 断开与无线蜂窝网络的连接, 并与 WLAN建立连接。 UE 在与该 WLAN 建立连接之后, UE 与验证、 授权和记账服务器 ( Authentication、 Authorization Accounting server, 简禾尔 AAA月艮务器或者 3A服务器) 进行鉴权认证, 并与 WLAN网络进行临时密钥协商, 在密钥协 商完成之后, UE才可以在该 WLAN上传递数据。 WLAN切换到无线蜂窝网 络的方法为: UE先与 WLAN 断开连接, 再与无线蜂窝网络建立连接。 UE 在与该无线蜂窝网络建立连接之后, UE与 3A服务器进行鉴权和密钥协商, 在协商完成之后, UE才可以在该无线蜂窝网络上进行数据的传递。  In addition, due to the limited network bandwidth resources, to meet the requirements of various services, it is necessary to switch between WLAN and wireless cellular networks. Switching between existing WLANs and wireless cellular networks includes: switching from a wireless cellular network to a WLAN, and switching the WLAN to a wireless cellular network. The method for the wireless cellular network to switch to the WLAN is as follows: The user equipment (User Equipment, UE for short) disconnects from the wireless cellular network and establishes a connection with the WLAN. After the UE establishes a connection with the WLAN, the UE performs authentication authentication with the authentication, authorization, and accounting server (Authentication, Authorization Accounting server, Jane AAA server or 3A server), and performs temporary key with the WLAN network. Negotiation, after the key negotiation is completed, the UE can transmit data on the WLAN. The method for the WLAN to switch to the wireless cellular network is as follows: The UE first disconnects from the WLAN and then establishes a connection with the wireless cellular network. After the UE establishes a connection with the wireless cellular network, the UE performs authentication and key agreement with the 3A server, and after the negotiation is completed, the UE can perform data transmission on the wireless cellular network.
但是, 由于 WLAN和无线蜂窝网络之间的切换过程中, 只能在切换到目 标网络后重新执行鉴权和密钥协商之后, 在该目标网络上进行数据的传递, 因此,导致了切换时间长较长问题,特别对于因特网协议语音(Voice over IP, 简称 VOIP) 或者视频等实时业务, 可能会进一歩导致业务中断问题。  However, since the switching between the WLAN and the wireless cellular network can only perform the authentication and key negotiation after switching to the target network, the data is transmitted on the target network, thereby causing a long switching time. Longer problems, especially for real-time services such as Voice over IP (VOIP) or video, may lead to business interruption problems.
发明内容 本发明实施例提供一种切换的处理方法和装置, 有效的解决了现有技术 中网络切换过程中业务中断, 切换时间长的问题, 使得 UE在网络切换过程 中业务不会中断, 缩短了网络切换的切换时间。 Summary of the invention The embodiment of the invention provides a method and a device for processing a handover, which effectively solves the problem of service interruption and long handover time in the network handover process in the prior art, so that the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and shortens the network. Switching time of switching.
本发明实施例第一个方面是提供一种一种切换的处理方法, 包括: 用户设备 UE接收基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令包括: 目标接入 点的名称 BSSID;  A first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including: receiving, by a user equipment, a handover command sent by a base station, where the handover command includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
所述 UE根据所述切换命令, 打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接 入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点;  The UE, according to the handover command, opens a wireless local area network WLAN to access a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point;
所述 UE 向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与所述目标接入点进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 以实现切换完成。  The UE sends a reconnect message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第二方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A second aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
第一网关接收切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 所述第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消息, 发送所述切换命令给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE根据所述切换命令, 打开无 线局域网 WLAN接入到所述切换命令中所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目 标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以及与所述目标接入点 进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  The first gateway receives the handover message, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the resource to the base station And switching the response message, so that the base station sends the handover command to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network WLAN to access the handover command according to the handover command. Determining a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sending a reconnect message to the target access point, and performing authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
结合第二方面, 在第二方面的第一种可能的实施方式中, 还包括: 所述第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。  With reference to the second aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes: the first gateway receiving the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the UE And sending an indication message, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第三方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A third aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
移动管理实体 MME接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目 标接入点的名称 BSSID;  The mobility management entity MME receives the handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
所述 MME根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并将所述切 换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所述目标接入点上预留资 源;  Obtaining, by the MME, the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sending the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. ;
所述 MME接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应 答消息向用户设备 UE发送非接入层 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一 网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; Receiving, by the MME, a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sending a non-access stratum NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and the first The gateway performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing;
所述 MME接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根据所述鉴 权协议成功消息向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切 换应答消息, 向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消息, 以完成 切换。  After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the MME sends a handover response message to the base station according to the authentication protocol success message, so that the base station sends the handover response message according to the handover response message. The UE sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point, so that the UE opens the WLAN access to the target access point, and sends a re-establishment message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第四方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
第一网关接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  The first gateway receives the handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
所述第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME根据所述切换应 答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  The first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME sends the handover response message to the user equipment according to the handover response message. The UE sends a NAS message to trigger the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
结合第四方面, 在第四方面的第一种可能的实施方式中, 还包括: 所述第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。  With reference to the fourth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the first gateway receiving the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the UE And sending an indication message, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第五方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
基站向第一网关发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括目标接入点的名称 BSSID, 以供所述第一网关根据所述切换消息, 在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资源;  The base station sends a handover message to the first gateway, where the handover message includes a name BSSID of the target access point, for the first gateway to use the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover message. Reserve resources on;
所述基站接收所述第一网关发送的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答 消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发所述 UE与 所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理;  The base station receives the handover response message sent by the first gateway, and sends a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to authenticate with the target access point. Authentication and key agreement processing;
所述基站接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根据所述鉴权 协议成功消息向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消 息, 以完成切换。  After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the base station sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, for the UE The wireless local area network WLAN is turned on to access the target access point, and a reestablishment message is sent to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第六方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A sixth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
第一网关接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的 名称 BSSID; The first gateway receives the handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: Name BSSID;
所述第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消 息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发所述 UE与所 述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  The first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover response message to the user equipment according to the handover response message. The UE sends a radio resource control protocol (RRC) message to trigger the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
结合第六方面, 在第六方面的第一种可能的实施方式中, 还包括: 所述第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。  With reference to the sixth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the method further includes: the first gateway receiving the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the UE And sending an indication message, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第七方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
用户设备 UE向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  The user equipment UE sends a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
所述 UE接收所述 MME返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答消 息与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理;  Receiving, by the UE, a handover response message returned by the MME, and performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message;
所述 UE打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点 发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  The UE opens a wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第八方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  An eighth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
移动管理实体 MME接收用户设备 UE发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息 包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  The mobility management entity MME receives the handover message sent by the user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
所述 MME根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并将所述切 换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所述目标接入点上预留资 源;  Obtaining, by the MME, the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sending the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. ;
所述 MME接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并将所述切换应答 消息向发送给所述 UE, 以使所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协 商处理, 并打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发 送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  Receiving, by the MME, the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sending the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing, And the wireless local area network WLAN access target access point is opened, and a reconnection message is sent to the target access point to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第九方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
第一网关接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  The first gateway receives the handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
所述第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME将所述切换应答 消息转发给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理, 并打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新 连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 The first gateway reserves a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point. And sending a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment UE, where the UE performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point. And opening the WLAN access target access point, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第十方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A tenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
用户设备 UE 向第一网关发送测量报告, 以使所述第一网关根据所述测 量报告获取所述 UE最终接入的目标基站;  The user equipment sends a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report;
所述 UE接收所述第一网关发送的切换命令, 并根据所述切换命令打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站,并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 所述 UE向移动管理实体 MME发送协商完成消息, 以实现切换完成。 本发明实施例第十一方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  Receiving, by the UE, a handover command sent by the first gateway, and performing LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and performing authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station; The mobility management entity MME sends a negotiation completion message to complete the handover. An eleventh embodiment of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
MME接收第一网关发送的切换消息;  Receiving, by the MME, a handover message sent by the first gateway;
所述 MME向目标基站发送预留资源消息, 以使所述目标基站进行预留 资源, 并返回预留标识;  Sending, by the MME, a reserved resource message to the target base station, so that the target base station performs reserved resources, and returns a reserved identifier;
所述 MME接收所述目标基站返回的所述预留标识, 并向所述第一网关 发送切换应答消息, 以使所述第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, 以供所述 UE 打开 LTE接入到目标基站,并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 所述 MME接收所述 UE发送的切换完成消息, 并向包交换网关 S/PGW 发送承载修改消息。  The MME receives the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access. Go to the target base station, and perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station; the MME receives the handover complete message sent by the UE, and sends a bearer modification message to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
结合第 ^一方面, 在第 ^一方面的第一种可能的实施方式中, 还包括: 所述 MME 向所述目标基站发送携带所述预留标识的上下文建立消息, 以使 所述目标基站获取预留的资源;  In a first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: sending, by the MME, a context setup message carrying the reservation identifier to the target base station, to enable the target base station Obtain reserved resources;
所述 MME向所述 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络切换。  The MME sends an attach accept message to the UE to complete the network handover.
本发明实施例第十二方面提供一种切换的处理方法, 包括:  A twelfth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a method for processing a handover, including:
第一网关接收用户设备 UE发送的测量报告, 并根据所述测量报告获取 所述 UE最终接入的目标基站;  The first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the user equipment UE, and acquires the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report;
所述第一网关向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息;  Sending, by the first gateway, a handover message to the mobility management entity MME;
所述第一网关接收所述 MME发送的切换应答消息, 并向所述 UE发 送切换命令,以使所述 UE打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站,以完成网络切换。  The first gateway receives the handover response message sent by the MME, and sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station to complete the network handover.
本发明实施例第十三方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令包括: 目标接入点的名称A thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, And a method for receiving a handover command sent by the base station, where the handover command includes: a name of the target access point
BSSID; BSSID;
接入模块, 用于根据所述切换命令, 打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述 目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点;  An access module, configured to: according to the switching command, open a wireless local area network (WLAN) to access a target access point corresponding to a BSSID of the target access point;
所述收发模块还用于向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与所述目 标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 以实现切换完成。  The transceiver module is further configured to send a reconnection message to the target access point, and perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point to implement handover completion.
本发明实施例第十四方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  A fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message, where the handover message includes: a name of a target access point BSSID;
处理模块, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消息, 发送所述切换命令给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE根据所述切换命令, 打开无 线局域网 WLAN接入到所述切换命令中所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目 标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以及与所述目标接入点 进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  a processing module, configured to reserve a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover command according to the handover response message Providing to the user equipment UE, for the UE to open the WLAN to access the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point in the handover command according to the handover command, and access the target access point The point sends a reconnection message, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
结合第十四方面, 在第十四方面的第一种可能的实施方式中, 还包括: 所述收发模块还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修 改处理, 以完成切换。  In conjunction with the fourteenth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fourteenth aspect, the method further includes: the transceiver module is further configured to receive, by the target access point, authentication and encryption with the UE The indication message sent after the key negotiation process, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第十五方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  A fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of a target access point;
获取模块, 用于根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并通过 所述收发模块将所述切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所 述目标接入点上预留资源;  An acquiring module, configured to acquire, according to a BSSID of the target access point, a first gateway, and send, by using the transceiver module, the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway is in the target Reserve resources on the access point;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所 述切换应答消息向用户设备 UE发送非接入层 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与 所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理;  The transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and send a non-access stratum NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform with the first gateway. Authentication authentication and key agreement processing;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根 据所述鉴权协议成功消息向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根 据所述切换应答消息, 向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切 换命令,以供所述 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点,并发送重建消息, 以完成切换。 The transceiver module is further configured to: after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, send a handover response message to the base station according to the authentication protocol success message, so that the base station according to the handover response message Transmitting, to the UE, a BSSID carrying the target access point And changing a command, for the UE to open the WLAN access to the target access point, and sending a reconstruction message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第十六方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接 入点的名称 BSSID;  A sixteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name of a target access point BSSID;
处理模块, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并通过所述收发模块向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME 根据所述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与 所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  a processing module, configured to reserve a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the MME by using the transceiver module, so that the MME responds according to the handover The message is sent to the user equipment UE to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
结合第十六方面, 在第十六方面的第一种可能的实施方式中, 还包括: 所述收发模块还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修 改处理, 以完成切换。  In conjunction with the sixteenth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the sixteenth aspect, the method further includes: the transceiver module is further configured to receive, by the target access point, authentication and encryption with the UE The indication message sent after the key negotiation process, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第十七方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括目标接入点的名称 BSSID, 以供所述 第一网关根据所述切换消息, 在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点 上预留资源;  A seventeenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to send a handover message, where the handover message includes a name BSSID of a target access point, where the first gateway is configured according to the Switching a message, reserving resources on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关发送的切换应答消息, 并根据所 述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发 所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理;  The transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message sent by the first gateway, and send a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and the target access Point for authentication and key negotiation processing;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根 据所述鉴权协议成功消息向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的 切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并 发送重建消息, 以完成切换。  The transceiver module is further configured to: after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, send a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, to The UE is enabled to open a wireless local area network (WLAN) to access the target access point, and send a reconstruction message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第十八方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  An eighteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of a target access point;
处理模块, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并通过所述收发模块向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根 据所述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以 触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 a processing module, configured to reserve a resource on a target access point corresponding to a BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the base station by using the transceiver module, so that the base station responds according to the handover a message, sending a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE, to The UE is triggered to perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway.
结合第十八方面, 在第十八方面的第一种可能的实施方式中, 还包括: 所述收发模块还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修 改处理, 以完成切换。  In conjunction with the eighteenth aspect, in a first possible implementation of the eighteenth aspect, the method further includes: the transceiver module is further configured to receive, by the target access point, authentication and encryption with the UE The indication message sent after the key negotiation process, and performing bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第十九方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点 的名称 BSSID;  A nineteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to send a handover message to a mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述 MME返回的切换应答消息;  The transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message returned by the MME;
处理模块, 用于根据所述切换应答消息与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理;  a processing module, configured to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message;
接入模块, 用于打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并通过所述收 发模块向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  The access module is configured to open a wireless local area network (WLAN) access target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point by using the transceiver module to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第二十方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收用户设备 UE发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的 名称 BSSID;  A twentieth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of a target access point;
获取模块, 用于根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并通过 所述收发模块将所述切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所 述目标接入点上预留资源;  An acquiring module, configured to acquire, according to a BSSID of the target access point, a first gateway, and send, by using the transceiver module, the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway is in the target Reserve resources on the access point;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并将所述 切换应答消息向发送给所述 UE, 以使所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理, 并打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标 接入点发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  The transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and send the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication and authentication. Key negotiation processing, and opening a wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
本发明实施例第二十一方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接 入点的名称 BSSID;  A twenty-first aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name of a target access point BSSID;
处理模块, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME将所述切换应答 消息转发给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理, 并打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新 连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 a processing module, configured to reserve a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment a UE, configured to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing on the UE and the target access point, and open a WLAN access target access point, and send a re-send to the target access point. Connect the message to complete the switch.
本发明实施例第二十二方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于向第一网关发送测量报告, 以使所述第一网关根据所述测量报告获取所 述 UE最终接入的目标基站;  A twenty-second aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a processing device for switching, including: a transceiver module, configured to send a measurement report to a first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the UE according to the measurement report. Target base station;
收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关发送的切换命令;  The transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover command sent by the first gateway;
接入模块, 用于根据所述切换命令打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站, 并通 过所述收发模块与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理;  An access module, configured to: open an LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station by using the transceiver module;
所述收发模块还用于所述 UE向移动管理实体 MME发送协商完成消息, 以实现切换完成。  The transceiver module is further configured to send, by the UE, a negotiation completion message to the mobility management entity MME, to implement handover completion.
本发明实施例第二十三方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收第一网关发送的切换消息;  A twenty-third aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by a first gateway;
所述收发模块还用于向目标基站发送预留资源消息, 以使所述目标基站 进行预留资源, 并返回预留标识;  The transceiver module is further configured to send a reserved resource message to the target base station, so that the target base station performs reserved resources, and returns a reserved identifier.
所述收发模块还用于接收所述目标基站返回的所述预留标识, 并向所述 第一网关发送切换应答消息, 以使所述第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, 以供 所述 UE打开 LTE接入到目标基站, 并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥 协商处理;  The transceiver module is further configured to receive the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and send a handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, for the UE Turning on LTE access to the target base station, and performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述 UE发送的切换完成消息, 并向包交换网 关 S/PGW发送承载修改消息。  The transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover complete message sent by the UE, and send a bearer modification message to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
结合第二十三方面, 在第二十三方面的第一种可能的实施方式中, 所述 收发模块还用于:  In conjunction with the twenty-third aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the twenty-third aspect, the transceiver module is further configured to:
向所述目标基站发送携带所述预留标识的上下文建立消息, 以使所述目 标基站获取预留的资源;  Sending, to the target base station, a context setup message carrying the reservation identifier, so that the target base station acquires the reserved resource;
向所述 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络切换。  An attach accept message is sent to the UE to complete the network handover.
本发明实施例第二十四方面提供一种切换的处理装置, 包括: 收发模块, 用于接收用户设备 UE发送的测量报告, 并根据所述测量报告获取所述 UE 最终接入的目标基站;  A twenty-fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present invention provides a switching processing apparatus, including: a transceiver module, configured to receive a measurement report sent by a user equipment UE, and acquire, according to the measurement report, a target base station that is finally accessed by the UE;
所述收发模块还用于向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息;  The transceiver module is further configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity MME.
所述收发模块还用于接收所述 MME发送的切换应答消息, 并向所述 UE发送切换命令, 以使所述 UE打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站, 以完成网 络切换。 The transceiver module is further configured to receive a handover response message sent by the MME, and send a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station to complete the network. Network switching.
本发明实施例提供的切换的处理方法和装置, 在网络切换的过程中, 通 过将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在网络切换完成前进行, 相较于现有技术 中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 并且进一歩的, 在接入点预留 用户设备需要的资源, 有效的解决了现有技术中网络切换过程中业务中断, 切换时间长的问题, 使得 UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断, 缩短了网络 切换的切换时间。 附图说明  The method and device for processing the handover provided by the embodiment of the present invention, in the process of network handover, by performing the authentication authentication and the key agreement processing in advance before the network handover is completed, compared with the prior art, the access is new. After the network, the authentication and the key negotiation are performed, and the resources required by the user equipment are reserved at the access point, which effectively solves the problem of service interruption and long switching time in the network switching process in the prior art. The UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, which shortens the switching time of the network handover. DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例或现有技术中的技术方案, 下面将对实 施例或现有技术描述中所需要使用的附图作一简单地介绍, 显而易见地, 下 面描述中的附图是本发明的一些实施例, 对于本领域普通技术人员来讲, 在 不付出创造性劳动性的前提下, 还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。  In order to more clearly illustrate the embodiments of the present invention or the technical solutions in the prior art, a brief description of the drawings used in the embodiments or the prior art description will be briefly described below. Obviously, the drawings in the following description It is a certain embodiment of the present invention, and other drawings can be obtained from those skilled in the art without any inventive labor.
图 1为基于本发明切换的处理方法的网络架构示意图;  1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a processing method based on handover of the present invention;
图 2为本发明切换的处理方法实施例一的流程图;  2 is a flowchart of Embodiment 1 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 3为本发明切换的处理方法实施例二的流程图;  3 is a flowchart of Embodiment 2 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 4为本发明切换的处理方法实施例三的信令流程图;  4 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 3 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 5为本发明切换的处理方法实施例四的信令流程图;  FIG. 5 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 4 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 6为本发明切换的处理方法实施例五的流程图;  6 is a flowchart of Embodiment 5 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 7为本发明切换的处理方法实施例六的流程图;  7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 8为本发明切换的处理方法实施例七的信令流程图;  8 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 7 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 9为本发明切换的处理方法实施例八的流程图;  9 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 10为本发明切换的处理方法实施例九的流程图;  FIG. 10 is a flowchart of Embodiment 9 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention; FIG.
图 11为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十的信令流程图;  11 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 10 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 12为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十一的流程图;  FIG. 12 is a flowchart of Embodiment 11 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention; FIG.
图 13为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十二的流程图  13 is a flowchart of Embodiment 12 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention.
图 14为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十三的流程图;  14 is a flowchart of Embodiment 13 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 15为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十四的信令流程图;  15 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 14 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 16为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十五的流程图;  16 is a flowchart of Embodiment 15 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 17为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十六的流程图; 图 18为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十七的流程图; 17 is a flowchart of Embodiment 16 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention; FIG. 18 is a flowchart of Embodiment 17 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention; FIG.
图 19为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十八的信令流程图;  FIG. 19 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 18 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention; FIG.
图 20为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十九的信令流程图;  20 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 19 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention;
图 21为本发明切换的处理装置实施例一的结构示意图;  FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention; FIG.
图 22为本发明切换的处理装置实施例二的结构示意图;  22 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 23为本发明切换的处理装置实施例三的结构示意图;  23 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 24为本发明切换的处理装置实施例四的结构示意图;  24 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 25为本发明切换的处理装置实施例五的结构示意图;  25 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 26为本发明切换的处理装置实施例六的结构示意图;  26 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 27为本发明切换的处理装置实施例七的结构示意图;  27 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 7 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 28为本发明切换的处理装置实施例一的结构示意图;  28 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 29为本发明切换的处理装置实施例九的结构示意图;  29 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 9 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 30为本发明切换的处理装置实施例十的结构示意图;  FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 10 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention; FIG.
图 31为本发明切换的处理装置实施例十一的结构示意图;  Figure 31 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 11 of the processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 32为本发明切换的处理装置实施例十二的结构示意图;  32 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 12 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention;
图 33为本发明用户设备一实施例的结构示意图;  33 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention;
图 34为本发明第一网关一实施例的结构示意图;  FIG. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of a first gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG.
图 35为本发明 MME—实施例的结构示意图;  35 is a schematic structural diagram of an MME according to an embodiment of the present invention;
图 36为本发明第一网关又一实施例的结构示意图;  36 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention;
图 37为本发明基站一实施例的结构示意图;  37 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a base station according to the present invention;
图 38为本发明第一网关再一实施例的结构示意图;  38 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention;
图 39为本发明用户设备又一实施例的结构示意图;  39 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention;
图 40为本发明 MME又一实施例的结构示意图;  40 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a MME according to the present invention;
图 41为本发明第一网关的另一实施例的结构示意图;  41 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention;
图 42为本发明用户设备的另一实施例的结构示意图;  42 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention;
图 43为本发明 MME的另一实施例的结构示意图;  43 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an MME according to the present invention;
图 44为本发明第一网关的第四个实施例的结构示意图。 具体实施方式  Figure 44 is a schematic structural view of a fourth embodiment of the first gateway of the present invention. detailed description
图 1为基于本发明切换的处理方法的网络架构示意图, 如图 1所示, 该 网络架构包括: 用户设备 (User Equipment, 简称 UE) , 与 UE连接的接入 点(Access Point,简称 AP),与接入点连接的可信的 WLAN接入网关(Tusted WLAN Access Gateway, 简称 TWAG) , 以及与 TWAG连接的信令网关, 简称 SGW)或者包交换网关(PDN Gate way, 简称 PGW)。其中, 该 TWAG 为 UE的第一跳路由器, 该 UE的 IP地址由 PGW分配发送给 TWAG, UE 再通过动态主机配置协议 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol , 简称 DHCP ) 等 IP地址分配协议从 TWAG获取 IP地址。 UE与 TWAG之间有 控制面信令,当前用于激活分组数据协议(Packet Data Protocol,简称 PDP ) 连接获取 IP地址。 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a processing method based on handover of the present invention, as shown in FIG. The network architecture includes: User Equipment (UE), an Access Point (AP) connected to the UE, and a Trusted WLAN Access Gateway (TWAG) connected to the access point. ), and a signaling gateway (referred to as SGW) or a PDN Gate Way (PGW) connected to the TWAG. The TWAG is the first hop router of the UE, and the IP address of the UE is sent by the PGW to the TWAG, and the UE obtains the IP address from the TWAG through an IP address allocation protocol such as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). . There is control plane signaling between the UE and the TWAG, which is currently used to activate the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) connection to obtain an IP address.
另外, 该网络架构还包括: 策略与计费规则功能单元 (Policy and In addition, the network architecture also includes: Policy and charging rules functional unit (Policy and
Charging Rules Function, 简称 PCRF)、 HSS月艮务器、 可信的 WLAN网络、Charging Rules Function (referred to as PCRF), HSS server, trusted WLAN network,
3A服务器, 3GPP网络。 本发明提供的切换的处理方法实施例均基于该图 1所示的架构。 3A server, 3GPP network. The processing method embodiments of the handover provided by the present invention are all based on the architecture shown in FIG.
图 2为本发明切换的处理方法实施例一的流程图, 基于图 1所示的网络 架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍本 实施例的技术方案, 如图 2所示, 该方法包括:  2 is a flowchart of a first embodiment of a method for processing handover according to the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail. Solution, as shown in Figure 2, the method includes:
S201 : UE接收基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令包括: 目标接入点的 BSSID。  S201: The UE receives a handover command sent by the base station, where the handover command includes: a BSSID of the target access point.
在本实施例中, 该基站为该 UE当前接入的蜂窝网的服务基站, 基站检 测到当前有可信的 WLAN网络可以接入时, 向 UE发送切换命令, 以使 UE 完成切换并接入该 WLAN。  In this embodiment, the base station is a serving base station of the cellular network currently accessed by the UE. When the base station detects that the currently trusted WLAN network can access, the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE completes the handover and access. The WLAN.
S202: UE根据所述切换命令, 打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点。  S202: The UE opens a WLAN access target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover command.
在本实施例中, 目标接入点为切换命令中携带的 BSSID对应的接入点, 即 UE切换后要接入的 WLAN的接入点。  In this embodiment, the target access point is an access point corresponding to the BSSID carried in the handover command, that is, an access point of the WLAN to be accessed after the UE is switched.
S203: UE向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与所述目标接入点进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 以实现切换完成。  S203: The UE sends a reconnect message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point to complete the handover.
在本实施例中, UE接入目标接入点后, 触发与目标接入点的鉴权认证和 协商处理。 完成鉴权认证和密钥协商处理后, 可以由 UE发起 handover attach 过程完成网络切换, 也可以由目标网关进行承载修改, 以使 PGW将所述 UE 承载切换到第一网关, 该 UE可在切换后的 WLAN网络进行通信。 In this embodiment, after the UE accesses the target access point, the authentication and negotiation processing with the target access point is triggered. After the authentication and key negotiation process is completed, the handover initiation process may be initiated by the UE to complete the network handover, or the target gateway may perform bearer modification, so that the PGW will use the UE. The bearer switches to the first gateway, and the UE can communicate on the switched WLAN network.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过基站发送切换命令给 UE, UE接 入目标接入点后进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 最后 UE 或目标网关触发 PGW完成网络切换, 以使 UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 将鉴权认证和密钥 协商处理提前在网络切换完成前进行, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后 进行的鉴权和密钥协商,本实施例人提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切 换时间。  In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the base station sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE accesses the target access point to perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing, and finally the UE or the target gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE The communication can be performed on the WLAN, and the authentication authentication and the key agreement processing are performed in advance before the network handover is completed. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art, the embodiment is The method provided shortens the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN.
图 3为本发明切换的处理方法实施例二的流程图, 基于图 1所示的网络 架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍本 实施例的技术方案, 如图 3所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the second embodiment of the processing method of the handover according to the network architecture of the present invention. In this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail. Solution, as shown in Figure 3, the method includes:
S301 :第一网关接收切换消息,所述切换消息包括目标接入点的 BSSID。 在本实施例中, 该第一网关为 UE切换后要接入的目标网关, 该第一网 关可以由 MME査询后台存储的目标 AP与目标网关的对应关系获取,也可以 由 MME根据接入点 AP与周边网关的对应关系配置获取。  S301: The first gateway receives a handover message, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point. In this embodiment, the first gateway is a target gateway to be accessed after the UE is switched, and the first gateway may be configured by the MME to query the correspondence between the target AP and the target gateway stored in the background, or may be accessed by the MME according to the MME. The mapping between the AP and the neighboring gateway is configured and obtained.
S302: 第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消息, 发送所述切换命令给 UE, 以供所述 UE根据所述切换命令, 打开 WLAN接 入到所述切换命令中所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点, 并向所述 目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以及与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥 协商处理。  S302: The first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover command according to the handover response message. And the UE is configured to enable the UE to access a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point in the handover command according to the handover command, and send a reconnection to the target access point. a message, and performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
在本实施例中, 在目标接入点上的预留资源包括目标接入点根据 UE 的 因特网协议语音状态指示 (Voice over IP, 简称 VOIP) 以及该 UE的 MAC 地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议语音资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。  In this embodiment, the reserved resource on the target access point includes the UE that needs to be reserved according to the UE's Voice over IP (VOIP) and the UE's MAC address reserved by the target access point. The Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource is reserved for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission.
具体的, 第一网关可以通过无线接入点控制和配置协议 (Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol Specification, 简禾尔  Specifically, the first gateway can be controlled by a Wireless Access Point Control Specification (Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol Specification, Jane
CAPWAP) 通知接入点预留资源。 CAPWAP) Notifies the access point to reserve resources.
可选的, 第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改 处理, 以完成切换。  Optionally, the first gateway receives an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover. .
在本实施例中, 第一网关进行承载修改可以为向 PGW发送修改响应消 息, 以使 PGW将所述 UE承载切换到第一网关, 该 UE可在切换后的 WLAN 网络进行通信。 In this embodiment, the first gateway performing the bearer modification may send the modified response to the PGW. So that the PGW can switch the UE bearer to the first gateway, and the UE can communicate on the switched WLAN network.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过第一网关接收切换命令, 并在目 标接入点上预留资源, 基站向 UE发送切换命令, 以使 UE接入目标接入点, 并进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理,最后 UE或目标网关触发 PGW完成网络切 换, 以使 UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后 进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法在目标接 入点上预留资源, 使得 UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和 密钥协商处理提前在网络切换完成前进行,缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时 间。  In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the first gateway receives the handover command, and reserves resources on the target access point, and the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE accesses the target access point, and performs authentication. The authentication and key negotiation process, the UE or the target gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN, compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. The data communication cannot be performed. The method provided in this embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the service is not interrupted during the network handover process, and the authentication and key negotiation processing is performed before the network handover is completed. Shorten the switching time from cellular to WLAN.
图 4为本发明切换的处理方法实施例三的信令流程图, 基于图 1所示的 网络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介 绍本实施例的技术方案, 如图 4所示, 该方法的具体流程为:  4 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a third embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example. The technical solution, as shown in Figure 4, the specific process of the method is:
S401 : 基站向 MME 发送切换消息, 该切换消息中包含目标接入点的 BSSID。  S401: The base station sends a handover message to the MME, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
S402: MME根据 BSSID选择第一网关, 并向第一网关发送切换消息。 在本实施例中, 该切换消息还包括 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址。 S403: 第一网关在 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源。  S402: The MME selects the first gateway according to the BSSID, and sends a handover message to the first gateway. In this embodiment, the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE. S403: The first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID.
在本实施例中, 目标接入点上的预留资源包括目标接入点根据 UE 的 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议语音 资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。  In this embodiment, the reserved resource on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE. The UE performs voice or video data transmission.
S404: 第一网关通过 MME向基站发送切换应答消息。  S404: The first gateway sends a handover response message to the base station by using the MME.
S405:基站向 UE发送切换命令,该切换命令中携带目标接入点的 BSSID。 S406: UE打开 WLAN接入到目标接入点;  S405: The base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command carries the BSSID of the target access point. S406: The UE turns on the WLAN to access the target access point.
S407: UE向目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与该目标接入点进行鉴权 认证和密钥协商处理。  S407: The UE sends a reconnect message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
S408: UE发起切换附着过程或者第一网关进行承载修改处理。  S408: The UE initiates a handover attach procedure or the first gateway performs bearer modification processing.
S409: PGW将所述 UE承载切换到第一网关, 完成网络切换。  S409: The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法,通过基站向 MME发送切换消息,ΜΜΕ 根据该切换消息选择第一网关, 并向第一网关发送切换命令, 第一网关根据 该切换命令在目标接入点上预留资源, 并通过 MME 向基站返回切换应答消 息, 基站向 UE发送切换命令, 以使 UE接入目标接入点, 并进行鉴权认证和 密钥协商处理, 最后 UE或目标网关触发 PGW完成网络切换, 以使 UE可以 在 WLAN进行通信,相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥 协商, 不能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法在目标接入点上预留资源, 使得 UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前 在网络切换完成前进行, 缩短蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。 In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the base station sends a handover message to the MME, selects the first gateway according to the handover message, and sends a handover command to the first gateway, where the first gateway is configured according to the The handover command reserves resources on the target access point, and returns a handover response message to the base station by using the MME, and the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE accesses the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing. The UE or the target gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. The method provided by the embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the service is not interrupted during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed before the network handover is completed, and the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened. Switch time.
图 5为本发明切换的处理方法实施例四的信令流程图, 基于图 1所示的 网络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介 绍本实施例的技术方案, 如图 5所示, 该方法的具体流程为:  FIG. 5 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example. The technical solution, as shown in Figure 5, the specific process of the method is:
S501 : 基站根据目标接入点的 BSSID选择第一网关, 并向第一网关发送 切换命令。  S501: The base station selects the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover command to the first gateway.
在本实施例中, 该切换命令包括目标接入点的 BSSID, 可选的, 还可以 包括 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址。  In this embodiment, the handover command includes a BSSID of the target access point. Optionally, the VOIP indication and the MAC address of the UE may also be included.
S502: 第一网关在 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源。  S502: The first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID.
在本实施例中, 目标接入点上的预留资源包括目标接入点根据 UE 的 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议语音 资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。  In this embodiment, the reserved resource on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE. The UE performs voice or video data transmission.
S503: 第一网关向基站发送切换应答消息。  S503: The first gateway sends a handover response message to the base station.
S504:基站向 UE发送切换命令,该切换命令中携带目标接入点的 BSSID。 S504: The base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command carries the BSSID of the target access point.
S505: UE打开 WLAN接入到目标接入点; S505: The UE turns on the WLAN to access the target access point.
S506: UE向目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与该目标接入点进行鉴权 认证和密钥协商处理。  S506: The UE sends a reconnect message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
S507: UE发起切换附着过程或者第一网关进行承载修改处理。  S507: The UE initiates a handover attach procedure or the first gateway performs bearer modification processing.
S508: PGW将所述 UE承载切换到第一网关, 完成网络切换。  S508: The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过基站选择第一网关, 并向第一网 关发送切换命令, 第一网关根据该切换命令在目标接入点上预留资源, 并向 基站返回切换应答消息,基站向 UE发送切换命令,以使 UE接入目标接入点, 并进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理,最后 UE或目标网关触发 PGW完成网络切 换, 以使 UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后 进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法在目标接 入点上预留资源, 使得 UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和 密钥协商处理提前在网络切换完成前进行, 缩短蜂窝网到 WLAN 的切换时 间。 In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the base station selects the first gateway, and sends a handover command to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover command, and returns a handover response message to the base station. The base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE accesses the target access point, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing. Finally, the UE or the target gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN. Compared to the prior art after accessing a new network The authentication and key negotiation performed cannot perform data communication. The method provided in this embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement are performed. The processing is performed before the network switching is completed in advance, and the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened.
图 6为本发明切换的处理方法实施例五的流程图, 基于图 1所示的网络 架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍本 实施例的技术方案, 如图 6所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the fifth embodiment of the processing method of the handover according to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1. In this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail. Solution, as shown in Figure 6, the method includes:
S601 : MME接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点 的 BSSID。  S601: The MME receives a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a BSSID of the target access point.
S602: MME根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并将所述 切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所述目标接入点上预留 资源。  S602: The MME acquires the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. .
在本实施例中, MME获取第一网关可以通过査询后台存储的目标 AP与 目标网关的对应关系, 也可以根据接入点 AP与周边网关的对应关系配置第 一网关。  In this embodiment, the MME obtains the first gateway by querying the correspondence between the target AP and the target gateway stored in the background, and may also configure the first gateway according to the correspondence between the access point AP and the neighboring gateway.
S603: MME接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息,并根据所述切换应 答消息向用户设备 UE发送网络附属存储 (Network Attached Storage , 简称 NAS ) 消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  S603: The MME receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sends a Network Attached Storage (NAS) message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and the first The gateway performs authentication and key agreement processing.
在本实施例中, 该 NAS消息通过基站和 MME遂传发送给 UE。  In this embodiment, the NAS message is transmitted to the UE through the base station and the MME.
S604: MME接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后,根据所述鉴 权协议成功消息向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切 换应答消息, 向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消息, 以完成 切换。  S604: After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the MME sends a handover response message to the base station according to the authentication protocol success message, so that the base station sends the handover response message according to the handover response message. The UE sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point, so that the UE opens the WLAN access to the target access point, and sends a re-establishment message to complete the handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过接收基站发送的切换消息, MME 获取第一网关并向该第一网关发送切换消息, 以使第一网关根据该切换命令 在目标接入点上预留资源, 并向 MME返回切换应答消息, MME向 UE发送 NAS消息, 触发 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, MME接收 所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 向基站发送切换应答消息, 以使 基站向 UE发送切换命令, UE打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 最后 UE或目 标网关触发 PGW完成网络切换, 以使 UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 相较于 现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法在目标接入点上预留资源, 使得 UE在网络切换过程中 业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入点前进 行, 缩短蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。 In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the MME acquires the first gateway and sends a handover message to the first gateway by receiving the handover message sent by the base station, so that the first gateway reserves the target access point according to the handover command. And returning a handover response message to the MME, the MME sends a NAS message to the UE, and triggers the UE to perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway. After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the MME sends a message to the UE. The base station sends a handover response message, so that the base station sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE opens the WLAN access target access point, and finally the UE or the destination The standard gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. The method reserves resources on the target access point, so that the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, and shortens the cellular network to the WLAN. Switch time.
图 7为本发明切换的处理方法实施例六的流程图, 基于图 1所示的网络 架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍本 实施例的技术方案, 如图 7所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 7 is a flowchart of Embodiment 6 of the processing method of the handover according to the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail. Solution, as shown in Figure 7, the method includes:
S701 : 第一网关接收 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括目标接 入点的 BSSID。  S701: The first gateway receives a handover message sent by the MME, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息还包括 UE的 VOIP和该 UE的 MAC地址。 In this embodiment, the handover message further includes a VOIP of the UE and a MAC address of the UE.
S702: 第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME根据所述切换应 答消息, 发送 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理。 S702: The first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME sends the NAS message according to the handover response message. And triggering the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
在本实施例中, 第一网关在目标接入点上的预留资源包括目标接入点根 据 UE的 VOIP以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议 语音资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。 具体的, 第一网关可以通过 CAPWAP通知接入点预留资源。  In this embodiment, the reserved resource of the first gateway on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP of the UE and the MAC address of the UE. And for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission. Specifically, the first gateway may notify the access point to reserve resources through the CAPWAP.
可选的, 第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改 处理, 以完成切换。  Optionally, the first gateway receives an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover. .
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过接收 MME发送的切换消息, 第 一网关根据该切换消息在目标接入点上预留资源, 并向 MME返回切换应答 消息, 以使 MME向 UE发送 NAS消息, 触发 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理, 第一网关接收到目标接入点发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 触发 PGW完成网络切换, 以使 UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 相较于现有技 术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据通信, 本实施 例提供的方法在目标接入点上预留资源, 使得 UE在网络切换过程中业务不 会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入点前进行, 缩 短蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。 The processing method of the handover provided in this embodiment, by receiving the handover message sent by the MME, the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and returns a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME sends the NAS to the UE. The message triggers the UE to perform authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway. After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the target access point, the first gateway triggers the PGW to complete the network handover, so that the UE can communicate on the WLAN. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing a new network in the prior art, data communication cannot be performed. The method provided in this embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the UE switches in the network. During the process, the service will not be interrupted, and the authentication and key agreement processing will be performed before the UE accesses the target access point. Short cell to WLAN switching time.
图 8为本发明切换的处理方法实施例七的信令流程图, 基于图 1所示的 网络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介 绍本实施例的技术方案, 如图 8所示, 该方法的具体流程为:  FIG. 8 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example. The technical solution, as shown in Figure 8, the specific process of the method is:
S801 : 基站向 MME 发送切换消息, 该切换消息中包含目标接入点的 S801: The base station sends a handover message to the MME, where the handover message includes the target access point.
BSSID。 BSSID.
S802: MME根据 BSSID选择第一网关, 并向第一网关发送切换消息。 在本实施例中, 该切换消息还包括 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址。 S803: 第一网关在 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源。  S802: The MME selects the first gateway according to the BSSID, and sends a handover message to the first gateway. In this embodiment, the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE. S803: The first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID.
在本实施例中, 目标接入点上的预留资源包括目标接入点根据 UE 的 In this embodiment, the reserved resources on the target access point include the target access point according to the UE.
VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议语音 资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。 The VOIP indication and the UE reserved for the MAC address of the UE need to reserve the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission.
S804: 第一网关向 MME发送切换应答消息。  S804: The first gateway sends a handover response message to the MME.
S805: MME根据该切换应答消息向 UE发送 NAS消息, 触发 UE与该 第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  S805: The MME sends a NAS message to the UE according to the handover response message, and triggers the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
S806:第一网关向 MME发送鉴权协议成功消息, MME判断鉴权过程完 成。  S806: The first gateway sends an authentication protocol success message to the MME, and the MME determines that the authentication process is completed.
S807: MME向基站发送切换应答消息。  S807: The MME sends a handover response message to the base station.
S808:基站向 UE发送切换命令,该切换命令中包含目标接入点的 BSSID。 S809: UE打开 WLAN接入到目标接入点, 并向目标接入点发送重新连 接消息。  S808: The base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command includes a BSSID of the target access point. S809: The UE opens the WLAN access to the target access point, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point.
S810: UE发起切换附着过程或者第一网关进行承载修改处理。  S810: The UE initiates a handover attach procedure or the first gateway performs bearer modification processing.
S811 : PGW将所述 UE承载切换到第一网关, 完成网络切换。  S811: The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过基站向 MME发送的切换消息, MME将该切换消息转发给第一网关,第一网关根据该切换消息在目标接入点 上预留资源, 并向 MME返回切换应答消息, 以使 MME向 UE发送 NAS消 息, 触发 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 第一网关接收到目 标接入点发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 以使 PGW完成网络切换, 相较于现 有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据通信, 本 实施例提供的方法在目标接入点上预留资源, 使得 UE在网络切换过程中业 务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入点前进行, 缩短蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。 The processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the MME forwards the handover message to the first gateway by using the handover message sent by the base station to the MME, and the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and sends the resource to the MME. Returning a handover response message, so that the MME sends a NAS message to the UE, and triggers the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway, after the first gateway receives the authentication protocol success message sent by the target access point, so that The PGW completes the network handover, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. The method provided in this embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that UE in the process of network switching It is not interrupted, and the authentication and key agreement processing is performed in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, and the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened.
图 9为本发明切换的处理方法实施例八的流程图, 基于图 1所示的网络 架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍本 实施例的技术方案, 如图 9所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 9 is a flowchart of Embodiment 8 of the processing method of the handover according to the embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the technology in this embodiment is introduced in detail. Solution, as shown in Figure 9, the method includes:
S901 : 基站向第一网关发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括目标接入点的 BSSID, 以供所述第一网关根据所述切换消息, 在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资源。  S901: The base station sends a handover message to the first gateway, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point, where the first gateway accesses the target corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover message. Reserve resources on the point.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息还包括 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址。 S902: 基站接收所述第一网关发送的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应 答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议(Radio Resource Control, 简 称 RRC) 消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商 处理。  In this embodiment, the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE. S902: The base station receives the handover response message sent by the first gateway, and sends a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and the The target access point performs authentication and key agreement processing.
在本实施例中, 该 RRC消息中包括目标接入点的 BSSID, 以使得该 UE 于该目标接入点完成鉴权认证和密钥协商。  In this embodiment, the RRC message includes a BSSID of the target access point, so that the UE completes authentication and key agreement at the target access point.
S903: 基站接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根据所述鉴 权协议成功消息向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消息, 以完成 切换。  S903: After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the base station sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, for the UE. The WLAN is opened to access the target access point, and a re-establishment message is sent to complete the handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法,通过基站向第一网关发送的切换消息, 以使第一网关根据该切换消息在目标接入点上预留资源, 基站接收第一网关 返回切换应答消息, 向 UE发送 RRC消息, 触发 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理, 基站收到第一网关返回的目标接入点发送的鉴权协议成 功消息后, 向 UE发送切换命令, 以供 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入 点, UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行 的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法在目标接入点 上预留资源, 使得 UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥 协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入点前进行, 缩短蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时 间。  The processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the handover message sent by the base station to the first gateway, so that the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and the base station receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway. Sending an RRC message to the UE, triggering the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway, and after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the target access point returned by the first gateway, the base station sends a handover command to the UE, For the UE to open the WLAN access to the target access point, the UE can communicate on the WLAN, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. The method provided by the embodiment reserves resources on the target access point, so that the service is not interrupted during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, and the cell is shortened. Network to WLAN switching time.
图 10为本发明切换的处理方法实施例九的流程图,基于图 1所示的网络 架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍本 实施例的技术方案, 如图 10所示, 该方法包括: FIG. 10 is a flowchart of Embodiment 9 of a processing method for handover according to the present invention, based on the network shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the technical solution of the embodiment is described in detail in the example that the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN. As shown in FIG. 10, the method includes:
S1001 : 第一网关接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括目标接入 点的 BSSID。  S1001: The first gateway receives a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息还包括 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址。 In this embodiment, the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE.
S1002: 第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留 资源, 并向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答 消息, 向用户设备 UE发送 RRC消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行 鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 S1002: The first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover response message to the user equipment according to the handover response message. The UE sends an RRC message to trigger the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
可选的, 第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改 处理, 以完成切换。  Optionally, the first gateway receives an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover. .
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过第一网关接收基站发送的切换消 息, 并根据该切换消息在目标接入点上预留资源, 向基站返回切换应答消息, 以使基站向 UE发送 RRC消息, 触发 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协 商处理, 第一网关向基站发送鉴权协议成功消息, 以使向 UE发送切换命令, 以供 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据 通信, 本实施例提供的方法在目标接入点上预留资源, 使得 UE在网络切换 过程中业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入 点前进行, 缩短蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。  The processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the base station, and reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and returns a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the RRC to the UE. And the first gateway sends an authentication protocol success message to the base station, so that the UE sends a handover command to the UE to enable the UE to open the WLAN access to the target interface. In the ingress, the UE can communicate on the WLAN, and the data communication cannot be performed compared to the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. The method provided in this embodiment is on the target access point. The resources are reserved, so that the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed before the UE accesses the target access point, and the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened.
图 11为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十的信令流程图,基于图 1所示的 网络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介 绍本实施例的技术方案, 如图 11所示, 该方法的具体流程为:  FIG. 11 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example. The technical solution, as shown in Figure 11, the specific process of the method is:
S1101 : 基站根据 BSSID选择第一网关, 并向第一网关发送切换消息。 在本实施例中, 基站可以用过后台査询 BSSID对应的目标接入点与网关 的关系确定第一网关, 也可以根据目标接入点与周边网关的对应关系配置获 取第一网关。 该切换消息中包括目标接入点的 BSSID、 VOIP指示以及 UE的 MAC地址。  S1101: The base station selects the first gateway according to the BSSID, and sends a handover message to the first gateway. In this embodiment, the base station may determine the first gateway by using the relationship between the target access point and the gateway corresponding to the background query BSSID, and may also obtain the first gateway according to the correspondence between the target access point and the neighboring gateway. The handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point, a VOIP indication, and a MAC address of the UE.
S1102: 第一网关在 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源。 在本实施例中, 目标接入点上的预留资源包括目标接入点根据 UE 的 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议语音 资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。 S1102: The first gateway reserves a resource on a target access point corresponding to the BSSID. In this embodiment, the reserved resource on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE. The UE performs voice or video data transmission.
S1103: 第一网关向基站发送切换应答消息。  S1103: The first gateway sends a handover response message to the base station.
S1104: 基站根据该切换应答消息向 UE发送 RRC消息, 触发 UE与该 第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  S1104: The base station sends an RRC message to the UE according to the handover response message, and triggers the UE to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
在本实施例中, 鉴权认证和密钥协商处理可以通过四次握手完成, 期间所 有消息通过基站遂传。  In this embodiment, the authentication and key agreement processing can be completed by four handshakes, during which all messages are transmitted through the base station.
S1105:第一网关向基站发送鉴权协议成功消息,基站判断鉴权过程完成。 S1106 : 基站向 UE 发送切换命令, 该切换命令中包含目标接入点的 S1105: The first gateway sends an authentication protocol success message to the base station, and the base station determines that the authentication process is completed. S1106: The base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command includes the target access point.
BSSID。 BSSID.
S1107: UE打开 WLAN接入到目标接入点,并向目标接入点发送重新连 接消息。  S1107: The UE opens the WLAN access to the target access point and sends a reconnection message to the target access point.
S1108: UE发起切换附着过程或者第一网关进行承载修改处理。  S1108: The UE initiates a handover attach procedure or the first gateway performs bearer modification processing.
S1109: PGW将所述 UE承载切换到第一网关, 完成网络切换。  S1109: The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过第一网关接收基站发送的切换消 息, 并根据该切换消息在目标接入点上预留资源, 向基站返回切换应答消息, 以使基站向 UE发送 RRC消息, 触发 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协 商处理, 第一网关向基站发送鉴权协议成功消息, 基站向 UE发送切换命令, 以供 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据 通信, 本实施例提供的方法在目标接入点上预留资源, UE在网络切换过程中 业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入点前进 行, 缩短蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。  The processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the base station, and reserves resources on the target access point according to the handover message, and returns a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the RRC to the UE. And the first gateway sends an authentication protocol success message to the base station, where the base station sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the WLAN access to the target access. The UE can communicate on the WLAN. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art, the data communication cannot be performed. The method provided in this embodiment is pre-targeted on the target access point. The resources are reserved, and the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process. The authentication and key agreement processing are performed before the UE accesses the target access point, and the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN is shortened.
图 12为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十一的流程图,基于图 1所示的网 络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍 本实施例的技术方案, 如图 12所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 12 is a flowchart of Embodiment 11 of the processing method of the handover according to the embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example. Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 12, the method includes:
S1201 : UE向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的 BSSID。  S1201: The UE sends a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a BSSID of the target access point.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息中还包括 VOIP指示以及 UE的 MAC地址, 可选的,还可以包括源接入点的 BSSID,第一网关的标识(IDentity,简称 ID), 以及用于密钥协商的随机数 SNonSe。 In this embodiment, the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE. Optionally, the BSSID of the source access point, the ID of the first gateway (IDent), and the random number SNon S e for key negotiation may also be included.
S1202: UE接收所述 MME返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答 消息与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  S1202: The UE receives the handover response message returned by the MME, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message.
S1203: UE打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入 点发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  S1203: The UE turns on the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
在本实施例中, 该重新连接消息使用协商好的密钥进行加密, 以使目标 接入点接收该 UE, 并指示第一网关进行承载修改, 以完成网络切换。  In this embodiment, the reconnect message is encrypted by using the negotiated key, so that the target access point receives the UE, and instructs the first gateway to perform bearer modification to complete the network handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过 UE向 MME发送切换消息, 并 接收 MME返回的切换应答消息, UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处 理, 完成鉴权认证和密钥协商处理后, UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入 点, 完成网络切换, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入点 前进行, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 并不 能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。  In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the UE sends a handover message to the MME, and receives a handover response message returned by the MME, and the UE performs authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway to complete authentication and key agreement. After the processing, the UE opens the WLAN to access the target access point, completes the network handover, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, which is compared in the prior art. The authentication and key negotiation performed after entering the new network cannot perform data communication. The method provided in this embodiment shortens the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN.
图 13为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十二的流程图,基于图 1所示的网 络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍 本实施例的技术方案, 如图 13所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 13 is a flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a second embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example. Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 13, the method includes:
S1301 : MME接收用户设备 UE发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID。  S1301: The MME receives a handover message sent by the user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息中还包括 VOIP指示以及 UE的 MAC地址, 可选的, 还可以包括源接入点的 BSSID, 第一网关的标识 ID, 以及用于密钥 协商的随机数 SNonse。  In this embodiment, the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE, and optionally, may further include a BSSID of the source access point, an identifier ID of the first gateway, and a random number used for key negotiation. SNonse.
S1302: MME根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并将所述 切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所述目标接入点上预留 资源。  S1302: The MME acquires the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. .
在本实施例中, 目标接入点上的预留资源包括目标接入点根据 UE 的 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议语音 资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。  In this embodiment, the reserved resource on the target access point includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE. The UE performs voice or video data transmission.
S1303: MME接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并将所述切换应 答消息向发送给所述 UE, 以使所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥 协商处理, 并打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点 发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 S1303: The MME receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sends the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication authentication and a key. Negotiating processing, and opening a wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
在本实施例中, 该重新连接消息使用协商好的密钥进行加密, 以使目标 接入点接收该 UE, 并指示第一网关进行承载修改, 以完成网络切换。  In this embodiment, the reconnect message is encrypted by using the negotiated key, so that the target access point receives the UE, and instructs the first gateway to perform bearer modification to complete the network handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过 MME接收 UE发送的切换消息, 并向 UE返回的切换应答消息,以使 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商 处理, 完成鉴权认证和密钥协商处理后, UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接 入点, 完成网络切换, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入 点前进行, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 并 不能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN 的切换时 间。  The processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the MME receives the handover message sent by the UE, and returns a handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing, and complete authentication authentication and After the key negotiation process, the UE opens the WLAN to access the target access point, completes the network handover, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, compared to the prior art. The authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network cannot perform data communication. The method provided in this embodiment shortens the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN.
图 14为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十三的流程图,基于图 1所示的网 络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细介绍 本实施例的技术方案, 如图 14所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a thirteenth embodiment of a method for processing a handover according to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1. In this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example. Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 14, the method includes:
S1401 : 第一网关接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消 息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID。  S1401: The first gateway receives a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息中还包括 VOIP指示以及 UE的 MAC地址, 可选的, 还可以包括源接入点的 BSSID, 第一网关的 ID, 以及用于密钥协商 的随机数 SNonse。  In this embodiment, the handover message further includes a VOIP indication and a MAC address of the UE, and optionally, may further include a BSSID of the source access point, an ID of the first gateway, and a random number SNonse for key negotiation. .
S1402: 第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留 资源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME将所述切换应 答消息转发给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和 密钥协商处理, 并打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重 新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  S1402: The first gateway reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment. a UE, configured to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing on the UE and the target access point, and open a WLAN access target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point to implement handover. carry out.
在本实施例中, 目标接入点上的预留资源包括目标接入点根据 UE 的 In this embodiment, the reserved resources on the target access point include the target access point according to the UE.
VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议语音 资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。 The VOIP indication and the UE reserved for the MAC address of the UE need to reserve the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission.
进一歩的, 在预留资源的同时, 第一网关生成随机数 ANo e, 并根据从 UE最后附着的网关上获取的成对主密钥 (Pairwise Master Key, 简称 PMK) 以及随机数 SNonse,计算成对临时密钥(Pairwise Transient Key,简称 PTK), 并将该 PTK发送给接入点, 以完成 UE和接入点的密钥协商处理过程。 Further, while the resource is reserved, the first gateway generates a random number ANo e, and calculates according to a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) obtained from the last attached gateway of the UE and a random number SNonse. Pairwise Transient Key (PTK), And sending the PTK to the access point to complete the key negotiation process of the UE and the access point.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过第一网关接收 ΜΜΕ发送的切换 消息, 并向 ΜΜΕ返回的切换应答消息, 以使 ΜΜΕ将该切换应答消息发送 给 UE, 以使 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 完成鉴权认证和 密钥协商处理后, UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 完成网络切换, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入点前进行, 相较于现有 技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 并不能进行数据通信, 本 实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。  In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the first gateway receives the handover message sent by the first gateway, and returns a handover response message to the UE, so that the handover response message is sent to the UE, so that the UE performs the handover with the first gateway. After the authentication and the key negotiation process are completed, the UE opens the WLAN to access the target access point, completes the network handover, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing in advance in the UE. The method provided in this embodiment shortens the cellular network to the WLAN by performing the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. Switch time.
图 15为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十四的信令流程图,基于图 1所示 的网络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细 介绍本实施例的技术方案, 如图 15所示, 该方法的具体流程为:  FIG. 15 is a signaling flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to Embodiment 14 of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a cellular network to a WLAN as an example, and the implementation is described in detail. The technical solution of the example, as shown in FIG. 15, the specific process of the method is:
S1501 : UE向 MME发送切换消息,该切换消息包括目标接入点的 BSSID。 S1501: The UE sends a handover message to the MME, where the handover message includes a BSSID of the target access point.
S1502: MME根据该 BSSID, 获取第一网关。 S1502: The MME acquires the first gateway according to the BSSID.
在本实施例中, MME可以通过后台査询目标接入点与周边网关的关系, 确定第一网关,也可以根据目标接入点与周边网关的对应关系配置第一网关。  In this embodiment, the MME may determine the first gateway by querying the relationship between the target access point and the neighboring gateway in the background, or may configure the first gateway according to the correspondence between the target access point and the neighboring gateway.
S1503: MME向第一网关发送切换消息。  S1503: The MME sends a handover message to the first gateway.
在本实施例中, 包含目标接入点的 BSSID和源接入点的 BSSID、 随机数 SNonce和 UE最后附着的网关的 ID以及 UE的 MAC地址和 VOIP指示。  In this embodiment, the BSSID of the target access point and the BSSID of the source access point, the random number SNonce, and the ID of the last attached gateway of the UE, and the MAC address and VOIP indication of the UE are included.
S1504: 第一网关在目标接入点上进行资源预留。  S1504: The first gateway performs resource reservation on the target access point.
在本实施例中, 第一网关根据 UE最后附着的网关的 ID选择 UE最后 附着的网关, 从 1该网关上获取 UE的安全上下文, gp : PMK。 第一网关 在目标接入点上预留资源, 具体的做法是第一网关通过 CAPWAP协议通 知目标接入点, 根据 UE的 VOIP指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE 需要预留的因特网协议语音资源或者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者 视频数据传输。 并生成随机数 ANonce, 并根据随机数 SNonce、 ANonce、 ΡΜΚ, 计算 PTK, 将该 PTK给目标接入点。  In this embodiment, the first gateway selects the last attached gateway of the UE according to the ID of the last attached gateway of the UE, and obtains the security context of the UE from the gateway, gp: PMK. The first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. Specifically, the first gateway notifies the target access point by using the CAPWAP protocol, and the Internet reserved by the UE according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE. A protocol voice resource or a video resource for the UE to perform voice or video data transmission. And generate a random number ANonce, and calculate PTK according to the random numbers SNonce, ANonce, and ,, and give the PTK to the target access point.
在本实施例中, 鉴权认证和密钥协商处理可以通过四次握手完成, 期间 所有消息通过基站遂传。  In this embodiment, the authentication and key agreement processing can be completed by four handshakes, during which all messages are transmitted through the base station.
S1505: 第一网关向 MME发送切换应答消息。  S1505: The first gateway sends a handover response message to the MME.
在本实施例中,该切换应答消息包含随机数 ANonce和 UE最后附着的网 关的 ID, 该 ID包括其 IP地址和 MAC地址。 In this embodiment, the handover response message includes a random number ANonce and a network to which the UE last attached. The ID of the gateway, which includes its IP address and MAC address.
S1506: MME将切换应答消息转发给 UE。  S1506: The MME forwards the handover response message to the UE.
S1507: UE根据切换应答消息与目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处 理。  S1507: The UE performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point according to the handover response message.
在本实施例中,UE根据 PMK,随机数 ANonse,随机数 SNonse计算 PTK。 In this embodiment, the UE calculates the PTK according to the PMK, the random number ANonse, and the random number SNonse.
S1508: UE打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向目标接入点发送重新连接 消息, 该消息使用 PTK加密。 S1508: The UE opens the WLAN access target access point and sends a reconnection message to the target access point, and the message is encrypted by using PTK.
S1509: 目标接入点接受该 UE, 并指示该第一网关进行承载修改处理。 S1510: 第一网关进行承载修改处理, 向 PGW发送修改请求。  S1509: The target access point accepts the UE, and instructs the first gateway to perform bearer modification processing. S1510: The first gateway performs bearer modification processing, and sends a modification request to the PGW.
S1511 : PGW将所述 UE承载切换到第一网关, 完成网络切换。  S1511: The PGW switches the UE bearer to the first gateway to complete network switching.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法,通过 UE向 MME发送切换消息, MME 向第一网关转发该切换消息, 第一网关向 MME返回的切换应答消息, MME 将该切换应答消息发送给 UE, 以使 UE与第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商 处理, 完成鉴权认证和密钥协商处理后, UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接 入点, 完成网络切换, UE可以在 WLAN进行通信, 在目标接入点上预留资 源, UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE接入目标接入点前进行,相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权 和密钥协商, 并不能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间, 并使得 UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断。  In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the MME sends a handover message to the MME, the MME forwards the handover message to the first gateway, and the handover response message returned by the first gateway to the MME, and the MME sends the handover response message to the UE, to After the authentication authentication and the key negotiation process are performed on the UE and the first gateway, the UE opens the WLAN to access the target access point, completes the network handover, and the UE can communicate on the WLAN. The resource is reserved on the target access point, and the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed in advance before the UE accesses the target access point, compared with the prior art. The authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network cannot perform data communication. The method provided in this embodiment shortens the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN, and enables the UE to not interrupt the service during the network handover process. .
图 16为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十五的流程图,基于图 1所示的网 络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从 WLAN切换到蜂窝网为例, 详细介绍 本实施例的技术方案, 如图 16所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a method for processing a handover according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, a user equipment is switched from a WLAN to a cellular network as an example. Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 16, the method includes:
S1601 : UE向第一网关发送测量报告, 以使所述第一网关根据所述测量 报告获取所述 UE最终接入的目标基站。  S1601: The UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report.
在本实施例中, 该测量报告中包括周边多个基站的标识,第一网关为 UE 当前接入附着的网关, 该第一网关根据査询后台存储的接入点和基站的对应 关系, 确定 UE要最终接入的目标基站。  In this embodiment, the measurement report includes an identifier of a plurality of neighboring base stations, where the first gateway is a gateway to which the UE is currently connected, and the first gateway determines the correspondence between the access point and the base station stored in the background. The target base station to which the UE is to eventually access.
S1602: UE接收所述第一网关发送的切换命令, 并根据所述切换命令打 开 LTE接入到所述目标基站, 并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处 理。 在本实施例中, UE接收的切换命令包括 ECGI。 S1602: The UE receives the handover command sent by the first gateway, and opens an LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station. In this embodiment, the handover command received by the UE includes an ECGI.
S1603 : UE向 MME发送协商完成消息, 以实现切换完成。  S1603: The UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME to complete the handover.
可选的, MME接收到该协商完成消息后, 向 SGW/PGW发送创建会话 消息,并向目标基站上下文建立消息,以使目标基站允许 UE接入通过, MME 再想 UE发送附着接收消息。  Optionally, after receiving the negotiation completion message, the MME sends a create session message to the SGW/PGW, and establishes a message to the target base station context, so that the target base station allows the UE to access, and the MME wants the UE to send the attach and receive message.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过 UE 向第一网关发送测量报告, 第一网关根据该测量报告, 获取 UE切换网络后要接入的目标基站, 第一网 关向 MME发送切换消息, 以使 MME将该切换应答消息发送给第一网关, 以使第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, UE打开 LTE接入目标基站, 并与目标 基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 完成鉴权认证和密钥协商处理后, UE向 MME发送协商完成消息, 以完成网络切换,将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前 在 UE 网络切换完成前进行, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴 权和密钥协商, 并不能进行数据通信, 本实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间。  In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway by using the UE, and the first gateway acquires, according to the measurement report, a target base station to be accessed after the UE switches the network, and the first gateway sends a handover message to the MME, to And causing the MME to send the handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, the UE opens the LTE access target base station, performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station, and completes authentication authentication. After the key negotiation process is performed, the UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME to complete the network handover, and the authentication authentication and the key agreement processing are performed before the UE network handover is completed. Compared with the prior art, the access is new. The authentication and key negotiation performed after the network cannot perform data communication. The method provided in this embodiment shortens the switching time of the cellular network to the WLAN.
图 17为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十六的流程图,基于图 1所示的网 络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从 WLAN切换到蜂窝网为例, 详细介绍 本实施例的技术方案, 如图 17所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the sixteenth embodiment of the method for processing a handover according to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1. In this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the WLAN to the cellular network as an example. Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 17, the method includes:
S1701 : MME接收第一网关发送的切换消息。  S1701: The MME receives the handover message sent by the first gateway.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息中包括 ECGI和 VOIP指示。  In this embodiment, the handover message includes an ECGI and a VOIP indication.
S1702: MME向目标基站发送预留资源消息, 以使所述目标基站进行预 留资源, 并返回预留标识。  S1702: The MME sends a reserved resource message to the target base station, so that the target base station performs reserved resources, and returns a reserved identifier.
在本实施例中, 目标基站预留的资源包括目标接入点根据 UE 的 VOIP 指示以及该 UE的 MAC地址预留的该 UE需要预留的因特网协议语音资源或 者视频资源, 以供所述 UE进行语音或者视频数据传输。  In this embodiment, the resource reserved by the target base station includes the Internet Protocol voice resource or video resource that the target access point needs to reserve according to the VOIP indication of the UE and the MAC address of the UE, for the UE. Perform voice or video data transmission.
S1703 : MME接收所述目标基站返回的所述预留标识, 并向所述第一网 关发送切换应答消息, 以使所述第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, 以供所述 UE 打开 LTE接入到目标基站,并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  S1703: The MME receives the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access. Go to the target base station, and perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station.
S1704: MME接收所述 UE发送的切换完成消息, 并向 SGW/PGW发送 承载修改消息。  S1704: The MME receives the handover complete message sent by the UE, and sends a bearer modification message to the SGW/PGW.
可选的, MME 向所述目标基站发送携带所述预留标识的上下文建立消 息,以使所述目标基站获取预留的资源, MME向所述 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络切换。 Optionally, the MME sends, to the target base station, a context setup that carries the reservation identifier. And the eNB sends an attach accept message to the UE to complete the network switch.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 通过 MME接收第一网关发送的切换 消息, MME向目标基站发送资源预留消息以使目标基站进行资源预留, 并向 第一网关发送切换应答消息, 以使第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, UE打开 LTE接入目标基站, 并与目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 完成鉴权 认证和密钥协商处理后, UE向 MME发送协商完成消息, 以完成网络切换, UE可以在蜂窝网进行通信, 在目标基站上预留资源, UE在网络切换过程中 业务不会中断, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE网络切换完成前进行, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 不能进行数据 通信造成中断, 本实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间, 并 UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断。  In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the MME receives the handover message sent by the first gateway, and the MME sends a resource reservation message to the target base station to enable the target base station to perform resource reservation, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway. The first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE opens the LTE access target base station, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station, and after completing the authentication and key agreement processing, the UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME. To complete the network handover, the UE can communicate on the cellular network, reserve resources on the target base station, and the UE does not interrupt the service during the network handover process, and the authentication and key agreement processing are performed in advance before the UE network handover is completed. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art, the data communication cannot be interrupted. The method provided in this embodiment shortens the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN, and the UE is in the Business is not interrupted during network switching.
图 18为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十七的流程图,基于图 1所示的网 络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从 WLAN切换到蜂窝网为例, 详细介绍 本实施例的技术方案, 如图 18所示, 该方法包括:  FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the seventh embodiment of the processing method of the handover according to the embodiment of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the WLAN to the cellular network as an example. Technical solution, as shown in FIG. 18, the method includes:
S1801 : 第一网关接收 UE发送的测量报告, 并根据所述测量报告获取所 述 UE最终接入的目标基站。  S1801: The first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the UE, and obtains the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report.
在本实施例中, 该测量报告中包括周边多个基站的标识,第一网关为 UE 当前接入附着的网关, 该第一网关根据査询后台存储的接入点和基站的对应 关系, 确定 UE要最终接入的目标基站。  In this embodiment, the measurement report includes an identifier of a plurality of neighboring base stations, where the first gateway is a gateway to which the UE is currently connected, and the first gateway determines the correspondence between the access point and the base station stored in the background. The target base station to which the UE is to eventually access.
S1802: 第一网关向 MME发送切换消息。  S1802: The first gateway sends a handover message to the MME.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息包括 ECGI和 VOIP指示。  In this embodiment, the handover message includes an ECGI and VOIP indication.
S1803 : 第一网关接收所述 MME发送的切换应答消息, 并向所述 UE 发送切换命令, 以使所述 UE打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站, 以完成网络切 换。  S1803: The first gateway receives the handover response message sent by the MME, and sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens LTE access to the target base station to complete network switching.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 第一网关接收 UE发送的测量报告, 并根据该测量报告确认 UE最终接入的目标基站, 并向 MME发送切换消息, 第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, UE打开 LTE接入目标基站, 并与目标基站 进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理,完成鉴权认证和密钥协商处理后, UE向 MME 发送协商完成消息, 以完成网络切换, UE可以在蜂窝网进行通信, 将鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE 网络切换完成前进行, 相较于现有技术中在接 入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协商, 本实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间, 并 UE在网络切换过程中业务不会中断。 In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the UE, and confirms the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report, and sends a handover message to the MME, where the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE. The UE opens the LTE access target base station, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station. After the authentication and key agreement processing is completed, the UE sends a negotiation complete message to the MME to complete the network handover, and the UE may be in the cellular. Network communication, authentication The authentication and key negotiation process is performed before the completion of the UE network handover. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art, the method provided in this embodiment shortens the cellular network to the WLAN. The switching time, and the UE does not interrupt the service during the network switching process.
图 19为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十八的信令流程图,基于图 1所示 的网络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细 介绍本实施例的技术方案, 如图 19所示, 该方法的具体流程为:  FIG. 19 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 18 of the processing method of the handover according to the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the implementation is described in detail. The technical solution of the example, as shown in FIG. 19, the specific process of the method is:
S1901 : UE向第一网关发送测量报告。 在本实施例中, 该测量报告中包 括 UE周边的多个基站的标识。  S1901: The UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway. In this embodiment, the measurement report includes identifiers of a plurality of base stations around the UE.
S1902: 第一网关根据测量报告获取 UE最终接入的目标基站。  S1902: The first gateway acquires a target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report.
在本实施例中, 该第一网关根据査询后台存储的接入点和基站的对应关 系, 确定 UE要最终接入的目标基站。  In this embodiment, the first gateway determines, according to the correspondence between the access point and the base station stored in the background, the target base station to which the UE is to be finally accessed.
S1903: 第一网关向 MME发送切换消息。  S1903: The first gateway sends a handover message to the MME.
在本实施例中, 该切换消息包扩 ECGI和 VOIP指示。  In this embodiment, the handover message packet expands the ECGI and VOIP indications.
S1904: MME向目标基站发送资源预留消息。  S1904: The MME sends a resource reservation message to the target base station.
S1905: 目标基站进行资源预留, 并向 MME返回预留标识。  S1905: The target base station performs resource reservation, and returns a reservation identifier to the MME.
S1906: MME向第一网关发送切换应答消息。  S1906: The MME sends a handover response message to the first gateway.
S1907: 第一网关根据该切换应答消息向 UE发送切换命令, 该命令包括 ECGIo  S1907: The first gateway sends a handover command to the UE according to the handover response message, where the command includes ECGIo.
S1908: UE根据该切换命令打开 LTE接入到目标基站, 并与目标基站进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  S1908: The UE opens the LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station.
S1909: UE向 MME发送协商完成消息。  S1909: The UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME.
S1910: MME向 SGW/PGW发送承载修改消息。  S1910: The MME sends a bearer modification message to the SGW/PGW.
S1911 : MME向目标基站发送携带预留标识的上下文建立消息, 以使目 标基站获取预留的资源。  S1911: The MME sends a context setup message carrying the reservation identifier to the target base station, so that the target base station acquires the reserved resource.
S1912: 目标基站根据该预留标识, 获取预留的资源, 准入控制通过。 S1912: The target base station acquires the reserved resource according to the reserved identifier, and the admission control passes.
S1913: MME向 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络切换。 S1913: The MME sends an attach accept message to the UE to complete the network switch.
本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 第一网关接收 UE发送的测量报告, 并根据该测量报告确认 UE最终接入的目标基站, 并向 MME发送切换消息, MME根据该切换消息向目标基站发送资源预留消息, 目标基站进行资源预 留, 并向 MME返回预留标识, MME向第一网关发送切换应答消息, 第一网 关向 UE发送切换命令, UE打开 LTE接入目标基站, 并与目标基站进行鉴 权认证和密钥协商处理, 完成鉴权认证和密钥协商处理后, UE向 MME发送 协商完成消息, MME向目标基站发送携带所述预留标识的上下文建立消息, 以使目标基站获取预留的资源, MME向 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络 切换, 在目标基站上预留资源, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE 网络 切换完成前进行, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥协 商, 本实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间, 并使 UE在网 络切换过程中业务不会中断。 In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the UE, and confirms the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report, and sends a handover message to the MME, and the MME sends the handover message to the target base station according to the handover message. a resource reservation message, the target base station performs resource reservation, and returns a reservation identifier to the MME, where the MME sends a handover response message to the first gateway, where the first network The UE sends a handover command to the UE, and the UE opens the LTE access target base station, and performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station. After the authentication and key agreement processing is completed, the UE sends a negotiation completion message to the MME, and the MME sends the message to the MME. The target base station sends a context setup message carrying the reservation identifier, so that the target base station acquires the reserved resource, and the MME sends an attach accept message to the UE to complete the network handover, reserve resources on the target base station, and authenticate the authentication. The key negotiation process is performed before the completion of the UE network handover. Compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art, the method provided in this embodiment shortens the handover of the cellular network to the WLAN. Time, and the UE will not be interrupted during the network handover process.
图 20为本发明切换的处理方法实施例十九的信令流程图,基于图 1所示 的网络架构, 在本实施例中, 以用户设备从蜂窝网切换到 WLAN为例, 详细 介绍本实施例的技术方案, 如图 20所示, 该方法的具体流程为:  FIG. 20 is a signaling flowchart of Embodiment 19 of the handover processing method of the present invention. Based on the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 , in this embodiment, the user equipment is switched from the cellular network to the WLAN as an example, and the implementation is described in detail. The technical solution of the example, as shown in FIG. 20, the specific process of the method is:
S2001 : UE向第一网关发送测量报告。 在本实施例中, 该测量报告中包 括 UE周边的多个基站的标识。  S2001: The UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway. In this embodiment, the measurement report includes identifiers of a plurality of base stations around the UE.
S2002: 第一网关根据测量报告获取 UE最终接入的目标基站。  S2002: The first gateway acquires a target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report.
在本实施例中, 该第一网关根据査询后台存储的接入点和基站的对应关 系, 确定 UE要最终接入的目标基站。  In this embodiment, the first gateway determines, according to the correspondence between the access point and the base station stored in the background, the target base station to which the UE is to be finally accessed.
S2003: 第一网关向 MME发送切换消息。  S2003: The first gateway sends a handover message to the MME.
在本实施例中,该切换消息包扩 ECGI和 VOIP指示,还包括源基站到目 标基站的透明容器和最后保存在 UE中的 UE临时标识,用于从 UE最后附着 的 MME上获取安全上下文。  In this embodiment, the handover message packet is extended by the ECGI and the VOIP indication, and further includes a transparent container of the source base station to the target base station and a UE temporary identifier that is last stored in the UE, and is used to obtain a security context from the last attached MME of the UE.
S2004: MME根据最后保存在 UE 中的 UE 临时标识找到最后附着的 MME并获取安全上下文, 即 PMK。  S2004: The MME finds the last attached MME according to the UE temporary identifier last saved in the UE and acquires a security context, that is, a PMK.
S2005: MME根据安全上下文, 向目标基站发送资源预留消息。  S2005: The MME sends a resource reservation message to the target base station according to the security context.
在本实施例中, 该资源预留消息触发目标基站与 UE的鉴权认证和密钥 协商处理。  In this embodiment, the resource reservation message triggers authentication authentication and key negotiation processing of the target base station and the UE.
S2006: 目标基站进行资源预留, 并向 MME返回预留标识。  S2006: The target base station performs resource reservation, and returns a reservation identifier to the MME.
S2007: MME向第一网关发送切换应答消息。  S2007: The MME sends a handover response message to the first gateway.
在本实施例中, 该切换应答消息包括源基站到目标基站的透明容器。 S2008: 第一网关根据该切换应答消息向 UE发送切换命令, 该命令包括 源基站到目标基站的透明容器。 S2009: UE根据该切换命令打开 LTE接入到目标基站, 并向目标基站发 送切换确认消息。 In this embodiment, the handover response message includes a transparent container from the source base station to the target base station. S2008: The first gateway sends a handover command to the UE according to the handover response message, where the command includes a transparent container of the source base station to the target base station. S2009: The UE opens the LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and sends a handover confirmation message to the target base station.
S2010: 目标基站通知 MME切换完成。  S2010: The target base station notifies the MME that the handover is completed.
S2011 : MME向 SGW/PGW发送承载修改消息。  S2011: The MME sends a bearer modification message to the SGW/PGW.
S2012: SGW/PGW向 MME返回承载修改应答消息, 以完成网络切换。 本实施例提供的切换的处理方法, 第一网关接收 UE发送的测量报告, 并根据该测量报告确认 UE最终接入的目标基站, 并向 MME发送切换消息, MME根据该切换消息向目标基站发送资源预留消息,触发目标基站与 UE进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 并进行资源预留, 并向 MME返回预留标识, MME向第一网关发送切换应答消息, 第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, UE打 开 LTE接入目标基站, UE向目标基站发送切换确认消息,目标基站通知 MME 切换完成, 在目标基站上预留资源, 将鉴权认证和密钥协商处理提前在 UE 接入网络之前进行, 相较于现有技术中在接入新的网络后进行的鉴权和密钥 协商, 本实施例提供的方法缩短了蜂窝网到 WLAN的切换时间, 并使 UE在 网络切换过程中业务不会中断。  S2012: The SGW/PGW returns a bearer modification response message to the MME to complete the network handover. In the processing method of the handover provided by the embodiment, the first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the UE, and confirms the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report, and sends a handover message to the MME, and the MME sends the handover message to the target base station according to the handover message. The resource reservation message triggers the target base station to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs resource reservation, and returns a reservation identifier to the MME, and the MME sends a handover response message to the first gateway, where the first gateway sends the message to the UE. The handover command, the UE opens the LTE access target base station, and the UE sends a handover confirmation message to the target base station, the target base station notifies the MME that the handover is completed, reserves resources on the target base station, and advances the authentication authentication and the key agreement processing in the UE access network. The method provided in this embodiment shortens the handover time of the cellular network to the WLAN, and the UE is in the process of network handover, as compared with the authentication and key negotiation performed after accessing the new network in the prior art. Business will not be interrupted.
图 21为本发明切换的处理装置实施例一的结构示意图, 如图 21所示该 处理装置, 包括: 收发模块 211和接入模块 212。 其中, 收发模块 211, 用于 接收基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 接入模块 212, 用于根据所述切换命令, 打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述 目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点; 所述收发模块 211还用于向所述目 标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商 处理, 以实现切换完成。  FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. The processing apparatus shown in FIG. 21 includes: a transceiver module 211 and an access module 212. The transceiver module 211 is configured to receive a handover command sent by the base station, where the handover command includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and an access module 212, configured to: open the WLAN access to the wireless local area network according to the handover command The target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point; the transceiver module 211 is further configured to send a reconnect message to the target access point, and perform authentication and key agreement with the target access point. Processing to achieve the completion of the switch.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例一对应, 其实现方式、 原 理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device for the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the first embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 22为本发明切换的处理装置实施例二的结构示意图。 如图 22所示, 该处理装置, 包括: 收发模块 221和处理模块 222。 其中, 收发模块 221, 用 于接收切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 处理模块 222, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源, 并向 基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消息, 发送所述 切换命令给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE根据所述切换命令, 打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述切换命令中所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以及与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理。 FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 2 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 22, the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 221 and a processing module 222. The transceiver module 221 is configured to receive a handover message, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and a processing module 222, configured to reserve on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point. And sending a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover command to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network according to the handover command. The WLAN accesses the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point in the handover command, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point, and performs authentication and authentication with the target access point. Key negotiation processing.
可选的, 收发模块 221还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进 行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。  Optionally, the transceiver module 221 is further configured to receive an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the indication message. To complete the switch.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例二对应, 其实现方式、 原 理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the second embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 23为本发明切换的处理装置实施例三的结构示意图, 如图 23所示, 该处理装置包括: 收发模块 231和获取模块 232,。 其中, 收发模块 231, 用 于接收基站发送的切换消息,所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 获取模块 232, 用于根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并通过 所述收发模块将所述切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所 述目标接入点上预留资源; 所述收发模块 231还用于接收所述第一网关返回 的切换应答消息,并根据所述切换应答消息向用户设备 UE发送非接入层 NAS 消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 所述 收发模块 231还用于接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根据所 述鉴权协议成功消息向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所 述切换应答消息, 向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命 令, 以供所述 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消息, 以 完成切换。  FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 3 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 23, the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 231 and an acquisition module 232. The transceiver module 231 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and an obtaining module 232, configured to acquire the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, And sending, by the transceiver module, the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point; the transceiver module 231 is further configured to receive the a handover response message returned by the gateway, and sending a non-access stratum NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway; The transceiver module 231 is further configured to: after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, send a handover response message to the base station according to the authentication protocol success message, so that the base station is configured according to the handover response message, Transmitting, to the UE, a handover command carrying a BSSID of the target access point, for the UE to open a WLAN access to the target access point, and sending a heavy Create a message to complete the switch.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例五对应, 其实现方式、 原 理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the fifth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 24为本发明切换的处理装置实施例四的结构示意图。 如图 24所示, 该处理装置, 包括: 收发模块 241和处理模块 242。 其中, 收发模块 241, 用 于接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入 点的名称 BSSID; 处理模块 242, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目 标接入点上预留资源, 并通过所述收发模块向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME根据所述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 可选的,所述收发模块 241还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE 进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。 FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 4 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 24, the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 241 and a processing module 242. The transceiver module 241 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and a processing module 242, configured to target the BSSID of the target access point. Reserving resources on the access point, and sending, by the transceiver module, a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME sends a NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and the The first gateway performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing. Optionally, the transceiver module 241 is further configured to receive an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification according to the indication message. Process to complete the switch.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例六对应, 其实现方式、 原 理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the sixth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 25为本发明切换的处理装置实施例五的结构示意图, 如图 25所示, 该处理装置, 包括: 收发模块 251。 收发模块 251, 用于发送切换消息, 所述 切换消息包括目标接入点的名称 BSSID, 以供所述第一网关根据所述切换消 息, 在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源; 所述收发模 块 251还用于接收所述第一网关发送的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答 消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发所述 UE与 所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 所述收发模块 251还用于接 收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根据所述鉴权协议成功消息向 所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打 开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点,并发送重建消息,以完成切换。  FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 5 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 25, the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 251. The transceiver module 251 is configured to send a handover message, where the handover message includes a name BSSID of the target access point, where the first gateway accesses the target corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover message. The receiving and receiving module 251 is further configured to receive a handover response message sent by the first gateway, and send a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the The UE performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point; the transceiver module 251 is further configured to: after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, according to the authentication protocol success message direction The UE sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point, and sends a reconstruction message to complete the handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例八对应, 其实现方式、 原 理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the eighth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 26为本发明切换的处理装置实施例六的结构示意图, 如图 26所示, 该处理装置包括: 收发模块 261和处理模块 262。 其中, 收发模块 261, 用于 接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 处理模块 262, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并通过所述收发模块向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根 据所述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以 触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 6 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 26, the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 261 and a processing module 262. The transceiver module 261 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and a processing module 262, configured to target the access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point. Reserving a resource, and sending a handover response message to the base station by using the transceiver module, so that the base station sends a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE and The first gateway performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing.
可选的,所述收发模块 261还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE 进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。  Optionally, the transceiver module 261 is further configured to receive an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification according to the indication message. Process to complete the switch.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例九对应, 其实现方式、 原 理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device for the handover provided in this embodiment corresponds to the ninth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 27为本发明切换的处理装置实施例七的结构示意图, 如图 27所示, 该装置包括: 收发模块 271、 处理模块 272和接入模块 273。 其中, 收发模块 271 , 用于向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接 入点的名称 BSSID; 所述收发模块 271还用于接收所述 MME返回的切换应 答消息; 处理模块 272, 用于根据所述切换应答消息与所述目标接入点进行 鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 接入模块 273, 用于打开无线局域网 WLAN接入 目标接入点, 并通过所述收发模块向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以 实现切换完成。 FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 7 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. The device includes: a transceiver module 271, a processing module 272, and an access module 273. The transceiver module 271 is configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the transceiver module 271 is further configured to receive a handover response message returned by the MME; The module 272 is configured to perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message, and the access module 273 is configured to open a wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and The transceiver module sends a reconnect message to the target access point to complete the handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例十一对应, 其实现方式、 原理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device for the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the eleventh embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 28为本发明切换的处理装置实施例一的结构示意图。 如图 28所示, 该处理装置包括: 收发模块 281和获取模块 282。 其中, 收发模块 281, 用于 接收用户设备 UE发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 获取模块 282, 用于根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并通过所述收发模块将所述切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网 关在所述目标接入点上预留资源; 所述收发模块 281还用于接收所述第一网 关返回的切换应答消息, 并将所述切换应答消息向发送给所述 UE, 以使所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理,并打开无线局域网 WLAN 接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  FIG. 28 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 1 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 28, the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 281 and an acquisition module 282. The transceiver module 281 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and an obtaining module 282, configured to acquire, according to the BSSID of the target access point, the first a gateway, and sending, by the transceiver module, the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point; the transceiver module 281 is further configured to receive the Transmitting a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and transmitting the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE performs authentication authentication and key negotiation processing with the first gateway, and opens a wireless local area network WLAN. Accessing the target access point and sending a reconnect message to the target access point to complete the handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例十二对应, 其实现方式、 原理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the method embodiment 12, and the implementation manner, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 29为本发明切换的处理装置实施例九的结构示意图。该处理装置, 包 括: 收发模块 291和处理模块 292。 其中, 收发模块 291, 用于接收移动管理 实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 处理模块 292, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME将所述切换应答 消息转发给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理, 并打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新 连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  FIG. 29 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 9 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. The processing device includes: a transceiver module 291 and a processing module 292. The transceiver module 291 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, and a processing module 292, configured to target the BSSID of the target access point. Reserving resources on the access point, and sending a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment UE, for the UE to authenticate with the target access point. The authentication and key negotiation process are performed, and the WLAN access target access point is opened, and a reconnection message is sent to the target access point to complete the handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例十三对应, 其实现方式、 原理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 图 30为本发明切换的处理装置实施例十的结构示意图, 如图 30所示, 该装置包括: 收发模块 301和接入模块 302。 其中, 收发模块 301, 用于向第 一网关发送测量报告, 以使所述第一网关根据所述测量报告获取所述 UE最 终接入的目标基站;收发模块 301还用于接收所述第一网关发送的切换命令; 接入模块 302, 用于根据所述切换命令打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站, 并通 过所述收发模块 301与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 所述收 发模块 301还用于所述 UE向移动管理实体 MME发送协商完成消息, 以实 现切换完成。 The processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the thirteenth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again. FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 10 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 30, the apparatus includes: a transceiver module 301 and an access module 302. The transceiver module 301 is configured to send a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway acquires the target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report, and the transceiver module 301 is further configured to receive the first a switching command sent by the gateway; the access module 302, configured to: open an LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and perform authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station by using the transceiver module 301; The transceiver module 301 is further configured to send, by the UE, a negotiation completion message to the mobility management entity MME, to implement handover completion.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例十五对应, 其实现方式、 原理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the fifteenth embodiment of the method, and the implementation manner, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 31为本发明切换的处理装置实施例十一的结构示意图,如图 31所示, 该处理装置包括: 收发模块 311, 用于接收第一网关发送的切换消息; 所述 收发模块 311还用于向目标基站发送预留资源消息, 以使所述目标基站进行 预留资源, 并返回预留标识; 所述收发模块 311还用于接收所述目标基站返 回的所述预留标识, 并向所述第一网关发送切换应答消息, 以使所述第一网 关向 UE发送切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开 LTE接入到目标基站, 并与所述 目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 所述收发模块 311还用于接收所述 UE发送的切换完成消息, 并向包交换网关 S/PGW发送承载修改消息。  FIG. 31 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 11 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 31, the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 311, configured to receive a handover message sent by a first gateway; And sending a reserved resource message to the target base station, so that the target base station performs the reserved resource, and returns a reserved identifier; the transceiver module 311 is further configured to receive the reserved identifier returned by the target base station, and The first gateway sends a handover response message, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station, and performs authentication and key agreement with the target base station. The transceiver module 311 is further configured to receive a handover complete message sent by the UE, and send a bearer modification message to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
可选的, 所述收发模块 311还用于:  Optionally, the transceiver module 311 is further configured to:
向所述目标基站发送携带所述预留标识的上下文建立消息, 以使所述目 标基站获取预留的资源; 向所述 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络切换。  Sending a context setup message carrying the reservation identifier to the target base station, so that the target base station acquires the reserved resource; and sending an attach accept message to the UE to complete the network handover.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例十六对应, 其实现方式、 原理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The processing device of the switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the sixteenth embodiment of the method, and the implementation, the principle, and the effect are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 32为本发明切换的处理装置实施例十二的结构示意图。如图 32所示, 该处理装置包括: 收发模块 321, 用于接收用户设备 UE发送的测量报告, 并 根据所述测量报告获取所述 UE最终接入的目标基站; 所述收发模块 321还 用于向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息; 所述收发模块 321还用于接收所 述 MME发送的切换应答消息, 并向所述 UE发送切换命令, 以使所述 UE 打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站, 以完成网络切换。  FIG. 32 is a schematic structural diagram of Embodiment 12 of a processing apparatus for switching according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 32, the processing apparatus includes: a transceiver module 321 configured to receive a measurement report sent by the user equipment UE, and obtain a target base station that the UE finally accesses according to the measurement report; Sending a handover message to the mobility management entity MME; the transceiver module 321 is further configured to receive a handover response message sent by the MME, and send a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target Base station to complete network switching.
本实施例提供的切换的处理装置与方法实施例十七对应, 其实现方式、 原理以及效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 The processing device for switching provided in this embodiment corresponds to the seventeenth embodiment of the method, and the implementation manner thereof The principle and effect are similar, and will not be described here.
图 33为本发明用户设备一实施例的结构示意图, 如图 33所示, 该用户 设备 (UE) 包括: 收发器 331和处理器 332, 该收发器 331用于接收基站发 送的切换命令, 所述切换命令包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 处理器 332 用于根据所述切换命令, 打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点;收发器 331向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 以实现切换完成。  FIG. 33 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 33, the user equipment (UE) includes: a transceiver 331 and a processor 332, where the transceiver 331 is configured to receive a handover command sent by the base station. The switching command includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the processor 332 is configured to: according to the switching command, turn on the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point; the transceiver 331 The target access point sends a reconnection message, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point to implement handover completion.
本实施例的用户设备, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的 处理方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The user equipment in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 34为本发明第一网关一实施例的结构示意图, 包括: 收发器 341和处 理器 342。 该收发器 341用于接收切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入 点的名称 BSSID; 处理器 342用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接 入点上预留资源, 并向基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切 换应答消息, 发送所述切换命令给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE根据所述切换 命令, 打开无线局域网 WLAN 接入到所述切换命令中所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以及与 所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  FIG. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of a first gateway according to an embodiment of the present invention, including: a transceiver 341 and a processor 342. The transceiver 341 is configured to receive a handover message, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the processor 342 is configured to reserve resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and Sending a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover command to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network WLAN to access the handover according to the handover command. And a target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point in the command, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point, and performing authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point.
可选的, 收发器 341还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行 鉴权认证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行 承载修改处理, 以完成切换。  Optionally, the transceiver 341 is further configured to receive an indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the indication message, To complete the switch.
本实施例的第一网关, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的 处理方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 35为本发明 MME—实施例的结构示意图, 如图 35所示, 该 MME 包括: 收发器 351和处理器 352。 收发器 351用于接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 处理器 352用于根据所述目 标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并将所述切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所述目标接入点上预留资源; 收发器 351接收所述第一 网关返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答消息向用户设备 UE发送非 接入层 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商 处理; 收发器 351接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根据所述 鉴权协议成功消息向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述 切换应答消息,向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消息, 以完成 切换。 FIG. 35 is a schematic structural diagram of an MME according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 35, the MME includes: a transceiver 351 and a processor 352. The transceiver 351 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point, where the processor 352 is configured to acquire the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and Transmitting a message to the first gateway, where the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point; the transceiver 351 receives a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and according to the handover response The message is sent to the user equipment UE to send a non-access stratum NAS message to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway. The transceiver 351 receives the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway. After, according to the The authentication protocol success message sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the handover response message, for the UE The WLAN is opened to access the target access point, and a re-establishment message is sent to complete the handover.
本实施例的 MME,可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的处理 方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The MME of this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 36为本发明第一网关又一实施例的结构示意图, 如图 36所示, 该第 一网关包括: 收发器 361和处理器 362, 收发器 361用于接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 处理器 362用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME根据所述切换应 答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。  FIG. 36 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 36, the first gateway includes: a transceiver 361 and a processor 362, where the transceiver 361 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME. The handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the processor 362 is configured to reserve a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the MME, The MME sends a NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
可选的, 收发器 361还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行 鉴权认证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行 承载修改处理, 以完成切换。  Optionally, the transceiver 361 is further configured to receive an indication message sent by the target access point after performing authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the indication message, To complete the switch.
本实施例的第一网关, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的 处理方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 37为本发明基站一实施例的结构示意图, 如图 37所示, 该基站包括: 收发器 371和处理器 372, 收发器 371用于向第一网关发送切换消息, 所述 切换消息包括目标接入点的名称 BSSID, 以供所述第一网关根据所述切换消 息, 在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源; 收发器 371 用于接收所述第一网关发送的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答消息, 向 用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述目标 接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 收发器 371用于接收所述第一网关发 送的鉴权协议成功消息后,处理器 372根据所述鉴权协议成功消息向所述 UE 发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开无线局 域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消息, 以完成切换。  37 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 37, the base station includes: a transceiver 371 and a processor 372, where the transceiver 371 is configured to send a handover message to the first gateway, where the handover message includes a target. a name of the access point, the BSSID, for the first gateway to reserve a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the handover message; the transceiver 371 is configured to receive the first a handover response message sent by the gateway, and sending a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point; After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the processor 372 sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, to The UE is enabled to open a wireless local area network (WLAN) to access the target access point, and send a reconstruction message to complete the handover.
本实施例的基站, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的处理 方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 图 38为本发明第一网关再一实施例的结构示意图, 如图 38所示, 第一 网关包括: 收发器 381和处理器 382, 收发器 381用于接收基站发送的切换 消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 处理器 382用于在所 述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源, 并向所述基站发送切 换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送 无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理。 The base station of this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again. 38 is a schematic structural diagram of a first gateway according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 38, the first gateway includes: a transceiver 381 and a processor 382, where the transceiver 381 is configured to receive a handover message sent by the base station, where the handover is performed. The message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point; the processor 382 is configured to reserve a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the base station, so that the The base station sends a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, to trigger the UE to perform authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the first gateway.
可选的, 收发器 381接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修 改处理, 以完成切换。  Optionally, the transceiver 381 receives the indication message that is sent by the target access point after performing the authentication and key agreement processing with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the indication message to complete the handover. .
本实施例的第一网关, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的 处理方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 39为本发明用户设备又一实施例的结构示意图, 如图 39所示, 用户 设备包括: 收发器 391和处理器 392, 收发器 391用于向移动管理实体 MME 发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  FIG. 39 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 39, the user equipment includes: a transceiver 391 and a processor 392, where the transceiver 391 is configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover is performed. The message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
收发器 391接收所述 MME返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答 消息与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理;  The transceiver 391 receives the handover response message returned by the MME, and performs authentication authentication and key agreement processing with the target access point according to the handover response message.
处理器 392打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点,并向所述目标接入 点发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  The processor 392 opens the wireless local area network WLAN access target access point and sends a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
本实施例的用户设备, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的 处理方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The user equipment in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 40为本发明 MME又一实施例的结构示意图, 如图 40所示, MME包 括:收发器 401和处理器 402,收发器 401接收用户设备 UE发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 处理器 402根据所述目标接 入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并将所述切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以 供所述第一网关在所述目标接入点上预留资源; 收发器 401接收所述第一网 关返回的切换应答消息, 并将所述切换应答消息向发送给所述 UE, 以使所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理,并打开无线局域网 WLAN 接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。  40 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of the MME according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 40, the MME includes: a transceiver 401 and a processor 402. The transceiver 401 receives a handover message sent by the user equipment UE, where the handover message includes: a name of the access point BSSID; the processor 402 acquires the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the handover message to the first gateway, where the first gateway is in the target Receiving a resource on the access point; the transceiver 401 receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sends the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform the authentication. Right authentication and key agreement processing, and open the wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
本实施例的 MME,可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的处理 方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 The MME in this embodiment may be used to perform processing of handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention. The technical solution of the method is similar to the technical effect, and will not be described here.
图 41为本发明第一网关的另一实施例的结构示意图, 如图 41所示, 该 第一网关包括:收发器 411和处理器 412,收发器 411接收移动管理实体 MME 发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID;  FIG. 41 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 41, the first gateway includes: a transceiver 411 and a processor 412, and the transceiver 411 receives a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME. The handover message includes: a name BSSID of the target access point;
处理器 412在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME将所述切换应答消息 转发给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协 商处理, 并打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接 消息, 以实现切换完成。  The processor 412 reserves a resource on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment UE. And performing the authentication and key agreement processing on the UE and the target access point, and opening the WLAN access target access point, and sending a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
本实施例的第一网关, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的 处理方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 42为本发明用户设备的另一实施例的结构示意图, 如图 42所示, 该 第一网关包括: 收发器 421, 收发器 421 向第一网关发送测量报告, 以使所 述第一网关根据所述测量报告获取所述 UE最终接入的目标基站;收发器 421 接收所述第一网关发送的切换命令, 并根据所述切换命令打开 LTE接入到所 述目标基站, 并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 收发器 421 向移动管理实体 MME发送协商完成消息, 以实现切换完成。  42 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 42, the first gateway includes: a transceiver 421, and the transceiver 421 sends a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway Acquiring, according to the measurement report, the target base station that the UE finally accesses; the transceiver 421 receives the handover command sent by the first gateway, and opens the LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and the The target base station performs authentication and key agreement processing; the transceiver 421 sends a negotiation completion message to the mobility management entity MME to implement handover completion.
本实施例的用户设备, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的 处理方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The user equipment in this embodiment may be used to perform the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention. The implementation principle and technical effects are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 43为本发明 MME的另一实施例的结构示意图,如图 43所示,该 MME 包括: 收发器 431, 收发器 431接收第一网关发送的切换消息; 收发器 431 向目标基站发送预留资源消息, 以使所述目标基站进行预留资源, 并返回预 留标识; 收发器 431接收所述目标基站返回的所述预留标识, 并向所述第一 网关发送切换应答消息, 以使所述第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开 LTE接入到目标基站, 并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商 处理;收发器 431接收所述 UE发送的切换完成消息,并向包交换网关 S/PGW 发送承载修改消息。  FIG. 43 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of an MME according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 43, the MME includes: a transceiver 431, the transceiver 431 receives a handover message sent by the first gateway; and the transceiver 431 sends a reservation to the target base station. a resource message, so that the target base station performs reserved resources, and returns a reservation identifier; the transceiver 431 receives the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway, so that The first gateway sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens the LTE access to the target base station, and performs authentication and key agreement processing with the target base station; and the transceiver 431 receives the handover sent by the UE. The message is completed and a bearer modification message is sent to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
可选的, 收发器 431还用于向所述目标基站发送携带所述预留标识的上 下文建立消息, 以使所述目标基站获取预留的资源; 收发器 431还用于向所 述 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络切换。 本实施例的 ΜΜΕ,可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的处理 方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。 Optionally, the transceiver 431 is further configured to send, to the target base station, a context setup message that carries the reservation identifier, so that the target base station acquires the reserved resource, and the transceiver 431 is further configured to send the identifier to the UE. Attach the accept message to complete the network switch. The ΜΜΕ of the embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
图 44为本发明第一网关的第四个实施例的结构示意图, 如图 44所示, 该第一网关包括: 收发器 441, 收发器 441用于接收用户设备 UE发送的测量 报告, 并根据所述测量报告获取所述 UE最终接入的目标基站; 收发器 441 用于向移动管理实体 ΜΜΕ发送切换消息; 收发器 441用于接收所述 ΜΜΕ 发送的切换应答消息,并向所述 UE发送切换命令, 以使所述 UE打开 LTE 接入到所述目标基站, 以完成网络切换。  44 is a schematic structural diagram of a fourth embodiment of a first gateway according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 44, the first gateway includes: a transceiver 441, configured to receive a measurement report sent by the user equipment UE, and according to The measurement report acquires a target base station that the UE finally accesses; the transceiver 441 is configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity, and the transceiver 441 is configured to receive the handover response message sent by the UI, and send the handover response message to the UE. And switching a command, so that the UE turns on LTE access to the target base station to complete network switching.
本实施例的第一网关, 可以用于执行本发明任意实施例所提供的切换的 处理方法的技术方案, 其实现原理和技术效果类似, 此处不再赘述。  The first gateway of this embodiment may be used to implement the technical solution of the processing method of the handover provided by any embodiment of the present invention, and the implementation principle and technical effects thereof are similar, and details are not described herein again.
本领域普通技术人员可以理解: 实现上述方法实施例的全部或部分歩骤 可以通过程序指令相关的硬件来完成, 前述的程序可以存储于一计算机可读 取存储介质中, 该程序在执行时, 执行包括上述方法实施例的歩骤; 而前述 的存储介质包括: ROM、 RAM,磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介 质。  A person skilled in the art can understand that all or part of the steps of implementing the above method embodiments may be implemented by hardware related to program instructions, and the foregoing program may be stored in a computer readable storage medium, when executed, The foregoing steps include the steps of the foregoing method embodiments; and the foregoing storage medium includes: a medium that can store program codes, such as a ROM, a RAM, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.
最后应说明的是: 以上各实施例仅用以说明本发明的技术方案, 而非对 其限制; 尽管参照前述各实施例对本发明进行了详细的说明, 本领域的普通 技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改, 或者对其中部分或者全部技术特征进行等同替换; 而这些修改或者替换, 并 不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本发明各实施例技术方案的范围。  Finally, it should be noted that the above embodiments are only for explaining the technical solutions of the present invention, and are not intended to be limiting thereof; although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those skilled in the art will understand that The technical solutions described in the foregoing embodiments may be modified, or some or all of the technical features may be equivalently replaced; and the modifications or substitutions do not deviate from the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention. range.

Claims

权 利 要 求 书 claims
1、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 1. A handover processing method, characterized by including:
用户设备 UE接收基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令包括: 目标接入 点的名称 BSSID; The user equipment UE receives the handover command sent by the base station, and the handover command includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
所述 UE根据所述切换命令, 打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接 入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点; The UE opens the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the switching command;
所述 UE 向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与所述目标接入点进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 以实现切换完成。 The UE sends a reconnection message to the target access point, and performs authentication and key negotiation with the target access point to complete the handover.
2、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 2. A switching processing method, characterized by including:
第一网关接收切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; 所述第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消息, 发送所述切换命令给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE根据所述切换命令, 打开无 线局域网 WLAN接入到所述切换命令中所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目 标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以及与所述目标接入点 进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 The first gateway receives the switching message, the switching message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point; the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends it to the base station Handover response message, so that the base station sends the handover command to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, so that the UE opens the wireless local area network WLAN access to the user equipment UE according to the handover command. The target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point is sent, a reconnection message is sent to the target access point, and authentication and key negotiation are performed with the target access point.
3、 根据权利要求 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 3. The method according to claim 2, further comprising:
所述第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。 The first gateway receives the instruction message sent by the target access point after completing the authentication and key negotiation process with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the instruction message to complete the handover.
4、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 4. A switching processing method, characterized by including:
移动管理实体 MME接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目 标接入点的名称 BSSID; The mobility management entity MME receives the handover message sent by the base station. The handover message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
所述 MME根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并将所述切 换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所述目标接入点上预留资 源; The MME obtains the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the switching message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. ;
所述 MME接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应 答消息向用户设备 UE发送非接入层 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一 网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; The MME receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sends a non-access layer NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message to trigger the UE to perform authentication and verification with the first gateway. Key agreement processing;
所述 MME接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根据所述鉴 权协议成功消息向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切 换应答消息, 向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消息, 以完成 切换。 After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the MME The right protocol success message sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the handover response message for the UE to open. The WLAN accesses the target access point and sends a reestablishment message to complete the handover.
5、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 5. A switching processing method, characterized by including:
第一网关接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; The first gateway receives the switching message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the switching message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
所述第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME根据所述切换应 答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进 行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 The first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME sends a message to the user equipment according to the handover response message. The UE sends a NAS message to trigger authentication and key negotiation between the UE and the first gateway.
6、 根据权利要求 5所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 6. The method according to claim 5, further comprising:
所述第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。 The first gateway receives the instruction message sent by the target access point after completing the authentication and key negotiation process with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the instruction message to complete the handover.
7、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 7. A switching processing method, characterized by including:
基站向第一网关发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括目标接入点的名称 The base station sends a switching message to the first gateway, where the switching message includes the name of the target access point.
BSSID, 以供所述第一网关根据所述切换消息, 在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资源; BSSID, for the first gateway to reserve resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the switching message;
所述基站接收所述第一网关发送的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答 消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发所述 UE与 所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; The base station receives the handover response message sent by the first gateway, and sends a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message to trigger the UE to authenticate with the target access point. Authentication and key agreement processing;
所述基站接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根据所述鉴权 协议成功消息向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并发送重建消 息, 以完成切换。 After receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, the base station sends a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message for the UE. Open wireless local area network WLAN access to the target access point, and send a reestablishment message to complete the handover.
8、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 8. A switching processing method, characterized by including:
第一网关接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的 名称 BSSID; The first gateway receives the switching message sent by the base station, where the switching message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
所述第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消 息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发所述 UE与所 述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 The first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point. source, and sends a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message, so as to trigger the UE to authenticate with the first gateway. Authentication and key agreement handling.
9、 根据权利要求 8所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 9. The method according to claim 8, further comprising:
所述第一网关接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修改处理, 以完成切换。 The first gateway receives the instruction message sent by the target access point after completing the authentication and key negotiation process with the UE, and performs bearer modification processing according to the instruction message to complete the handover.
10、 一种切换的处理的方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 10. A switching processing method, characterized by including:
用户设备 UE向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; The user equipment UE sends a handover message to the mobility management entity MME. The handover message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
所述 UE接收所述 MME返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所述切换应答消 息与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; The UE receives the handover response message returned by the MME, and performs authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point based on the handover response message;
所述 UE打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点 发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 The UE turns on the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point, and sends a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
11、 一种切换的处理的方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 11. A handover processing method, characterized by including:
移动管理实体 MME接收用户设备 UE发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息 包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; The mobility management entity MME receives the handover message sent by the user equipment UE. The handover message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
所述 MME根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并将所述切 换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所述目标接入点上预留资 源; The MME obtains the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends the switching message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway reserves resources on the target access point. ;
所述 MME接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并将所述切换应答 消息向发送给所述 UE, 以使所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协 商处理, 并打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发 送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 The MME receives the handover response message returned by the first gateway, and sends the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication and key negotiation processes, And open the wireless local area network WLAN access target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point to complete the handover.
12、 一种切换的处理的方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 12. A handover processing method, characterized by including:
第一网关接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; The first gateway receives a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
所述第一网关在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME将所述切换应答 消息转发给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理, 并打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新 连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 The first gateway reserves resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and sends a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment. UE, for the UE to perform authentication and encryption with the target access point. Key negotiation processing is performed, and the WLAN access target access point is opened, and a reconnection message is sent to the target access point to complete the handover.
13、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 13. A handover processing method, characterized by including:
用户设备 UE 向第一网关发送测量报告, 以使所述第一网关根据所述测 量报告获取所述 UE最终接入的目标基站; The user equipment UE sends a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway obtains the target base station that the UE finally accesses based on the measurement report;
所述 UE接收所述第一网关发送的切换命令, 并根据所述切换命令打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站,并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 所述 UE向移动管理实体 MME发送协商完成消息, 以实现切换完成。 The UE receives the switching command sent by the first gateway, opens LTE access to the target base station according to the switching command, and performs authentication and key negotiation with the target base station; the UE The mobility management entity MME sends a negotiation completion message to complete the handover.
14、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 14. A handover processing method, characterized by including:
MME接收第一网关发送的切换消息; The MME receives the handover message sent by the first gateway;
所述 MME向目标基站发送预留资源消息, 以使所述目标基站进行预留 资源, 并返回预留标识; The MME sends a resource reservation message to the target base station, so that the target base station reserves resources and returns a reservation identifier;
所述 MME接收所述目标基站返回的所述预留标识, 并向所述第一网关 发送切换应答消息, 以使所述第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, 以供所述 UE 打开 LTE接入到目标基站,并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; 所述 MME接收所述 UE发送的切换完成消息, 并向包交换网关 S/PGW 发送承载修改消息。 The MME receives the reservation identifier returned by the target base station, and sends a handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE for the UE to open LTE access. to the target base station, and perform authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station; the MME receives the handover completion message sent by the UE, and sends a bearer modification message to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
15、 根据权利要求 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法还包括: 所述 MME向所述目标基站发送携带所述预留标识的上下文建立消息, 以使所述目标基站获取预留的资源; 15. The method according to claim 14, wherein the method further includes: the MME sending a context establishment message carrying the reservation identifier to the target base station, so that the target base station obtains the reservation. H;
所述 MME向所述 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络切换。 The MME sends an attach accept message to the UE to complete network switching.
16、 一种切换的处理方法, 其特征在于, 包括 16. A switching processing method, characterized by including:
第一网关接收用户设备 UE发送的测量报告, 并根据所述测量报告获取 所述 UE最终接入的目标基站; The first gateway receives the measurement report sent by the user equipment UE, and obtains the target base station that the UE finally accesses based on the measurement report;
所述第一网关向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息; The first gateway sends a handover message to the mobility management entity MME;
所述第一网关接收所述 MME发送的切换应答消息, 并向所述 UE发 送切换命令,以使所述 UE打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站,以完成网络切换。 The first gateway receives the handover response message sent by the MME, and sends a handover command to the UE, so that the UE opens LTE access to the target base station to complete the network handover.
17、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 17. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令包括: 目标接 入点的名称 BSSID; 接入模块, 用于根据所述切换命令, 打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述 目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点; A transceiver module, configured to receive a switching command sent by the base station, where the switching command includes: the name BSSID of the target access point; An access module, configured to open a wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the switching command;
所述收发模块还用于向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 并与所述目 标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理, 以实现切换完成。 The transceiver module is also configured to send a reconnection message to the target access point, and perform authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point to complete the handover.
18、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 18. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; A transceiver module, configured to receive a switching message, where the switching message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
处理模块, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根据所述切换应答消息, 发送所述切换命令给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE根据所述切换命令, 打开无 线局域网 WLAN接入到所述切换命令中所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目 标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以及与所述目标接入点 进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 A processing module configured to reserve resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the base station, so that the base station sends the handover command according to the handover response message. Give the user equipment UE, so that the UE can open the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point in the switching command according to the switching command, and access the target The access point sends a reconnection message, and performs authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point.
19、 根据权利要求 18所述的装置, 其特征在于, 还包括: 19. The device according to claim 18, further comprising:
所述收发模块还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修 改处理, 以完成切换。 The transceiver module is also configured to receive an instruction message sent by the target access point after completing the authentication and key negotiation process with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the instruction message to complete the handover. .
20、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 20. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接 入点的名称 BSSID; A transceiver module, configured to receive a switching message sent by the base station, where the switching message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
获取模块, 用于根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并通过 所述收发模块将所述切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所 述目标接入点上预留资源; The acquisition module is configured to acquire the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and send the switching message to the first gateway through the transceiver module, so that the first gateway can connect to the target access point. Reserve resources on the access point;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并根据所 述切换应答消息向用户设备 UE发送非接入层 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与 所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; The transceiver module is also configured to receive a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and send a non-access layer NAS message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message to trigger the UE to communicate with the first gateway. Authentication and key negotiation processing;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根 据所述鉴权协议成功消息向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根 据所述切换应答消息, 向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的切 换命令,以供所述 UE打开 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点,并发送重建消息, 以完成切换。 The transceiver module is also configured to, after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, send a handover response message to the base station according to the authentication protocol success message, so that the base station responds according to the handover response message. , sending a handover command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE, so that the UE can open WLAN access to the target access point, and send a reestablishment message, to complete the switch.
21、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 21. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消 息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; A transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
处理模块, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并通过所述收发模块向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME 根据所述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送 NAS消息, 以触发所述 UE与 所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 A processing module, configured to reserve resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the MME through the transceiver module, so that the MME responds according to the handover response message, sending a NAS message to the user equipment UE to trigger authentication and key negotiation processing between the UE and the first gateway.
22、 根据权利要求 21所述的装置, 其特征在于, 还包括: 22. The device according to claim 21, further comprising:
所述收发模块还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修 改处理, 以完成切换。 The transceiver module is also configured to receive an instruction message sent by the target access point after completing the authentication and key negotiation process with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the instruction message to complete the handover. .
23、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 23. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包括目标接入点的名称 BSSID, 以供所述第一网关根据所述切换消息, 在所述目标接入点的 BSSID 对应的目标接入点上预留资源; A transceiver module, configured to send a switching message, where the switching message includes the name BSSID of the target access point, so that the first gateway can select the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point according to the switching message. Reserve resources;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关发送的切换应答消息, 并根据所 述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以触发 所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; The transceiver module is also configured to receive a handover response message sent by the first gateway, and send a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE according to the handover response message to trigger the UE to access the target. Click to perform authentication and key negotiation processing;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关发送的鉴权协议成功消息后, 根 据所述鉴权协议成功消息向所述 UE发送携带有所述目标接入点的 BSSID的 切换命令, 以供所述 UE打开无线局域网 WLAN接入到所述目标接入点, 并 发送重建消息, 以完成切换。 The transceiver module is further configured to, after receiving the authentication protocol success message sent by the first gateway, send a switching command carrying the BSSID of the target access point to the UE according to the authentication protocol success message, so as to For the UE to open a wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point, and send a reestablishment message to complete the handover.
24、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 24. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收基站发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接 入点的名称 BSSID; A transceiver module, configured to receive a switching message sent by the base station, where the switching message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
处理模块, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并通过所述收发模块向所述基站发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述基站根 据所述切换应答消息, 向用户设备 UE发送无线资源控制协议 RRC消息, 以 触发所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理。 A processing module, configured to reserve resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the base station through the transceiver module, so that the base station responds according to the handover response message, sending a radio resource control protocol RRC message to the user equipment UE to trigger authentication and key negotiation processing between the UE and the first gateway.
25、 根据权利要求 24所述的装置, 其特征在于, 还包括: 25. The device according to claim 24, further comprising:
所述收发模块还用于接收所述目标接入点在完成与所述 UE进行鉴权认 证和密钥协商处理之后发送的指示消息, 并根据所述指示消息, 进行承载修 改处理, 以完成切换。 The transceiver module is also configured to receive an instruction message sent by the target access point after completing the authentication and key negotiation process with the UE, and perform bearer modification processing according to the instruction message to complete the handover. .
26、 一种切换的处理的方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 26. A handover processing method, characterized by including:
收发模块, 用于向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息, 所述切换消息包 括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; A transceiver module, configured to send a handover message to the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述 MME返回的切换应答消息; The transceiver module is also configured to receive a handover response message returned by the MME;
处理模块, 用于根据所述切换应答消息与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理; A processing module, configured to perform authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point according to the handover response message;
接入模块, 用于打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并通过所述收 发模块向所述目标接入点发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 The access module is used to open the wireless local area network WLAN to access the target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point through the transceiver module to complete the handover.
27、 一种切换的处理的装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 27. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收用户设备 UE发送的切换消息, 所述切换消息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; A transceiver module, configured to receive a switching message sent by the user equipment UE, where the switching message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
获取模块, 用于根据所述目标接入点的 BSSID, 获取第一网关, 并通过 所述收发模块将所述切换消息发送给所述第一网关, 以供所述第一网关在所 述目标接入点上预留资源; The acquisition module is configured to acquire the first gateway according to the BSSID of the target access point, and send the switching message to the first gateway through the transceiver module, so that the first gateway can connect to the target access point. Reserve resources on the access point;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关返回的切换应答消息, 并将所述 切换应答消息向发送给所述 UE, 以使所述 UE与所述第一网关进行鉴权认证 和密钥协商处理, 并打开无线局域网 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标 接入点发送重新连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 The transceiver module is also configured to receive a handover response message returned by the first gateway, and send the handover response message to the UE, so that the UE and the first gateway perform authentication and encryption. Key negotiation processing is performed, and the wireless local area network WLAN access target access point is opened, and a reconnection message is sent to the target access point to complete the handover.
28、 一种切换的处理的装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 28. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收移动管理实体 MME发送的切换消息, 所述切换消 息包括: 目标接入点的名称 BSSID; A transceiver module, configured to receive a handover message sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the handover message includes: the name BSSID of the target access point;
处理模块, 用于在所述目标接入点的 BSSID对应的目标接入点上预留资 源, 并向所述 MME发送切换应答消息, 以使得所述 MME将所述切换应答 消息转发给用户设备 UE, 以供所述 UE与所述目标接入点进行鉴权认证和密 钥协商处理, 并打开 WLAN接入目标接入点, 并向所述目标接入点发送重新 连接消息, 以实现切换完成。 A processing module configured to reserve resources on the target access point corresponding to the BSSID of the target access point, and send a handover response message to the MME, so that the MME forwards the handover response message to the user equipment. UE, for the UE to perform authentication and key negotiation processing with the target access point, open WLAN access to the target access point, and send a reconnection message to the target access point to implement handover. Finish.
29、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 29. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于向第一网关发送测量报告, 以使所述第一网关根据所述 测量报告获取所述 UE最终接入的目标基站; A transceiver module, configured to send a measurement report to the first gateway, so that the first gateway obtains the target base station that the UE finally accesses based on the measurement report;
收发模块还用于接收所述第一网关发送的切换命令; The transceiver module is also used to receive the switching command sent by the first gateway;
接入模块, 用于根据所述切换命令打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站, 并通 过所述收发模块与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥协商处理; An access module, configured to open LTE access to the target base station according to the handover command, and perform authentication and key negotiation processing with the target base station through the transceiver module;
所述收发模块还用于所述 UE向移动管理实体 MME发送协商完成消息, 以实现切换完成。 The transceiver module is also configured for the UE to send a negotiation completion message to the mobility management entity MME to complete the handover.
30、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 30. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收第一网关发送的切换消息; A transceiver module, configured to receive the switching message sent by the first gateway;
所述收发模块还用于向目标基站发送预留资源消息, 以使所述目标基站 进行预留资源, 并返回预留标识; The transceiver module is also used to send a resource reservation message to the target base station, so that the target base station reserves resources and returns a reservation identification;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述目标基站返回的所述预留标识, 并向所述 第一网关发送切换应答消息, 以使所述第一网关向 UE发送切换命令, 以供 所述 UE打开 LTE接入到目标基站, 并与所述目标基站进行鉴权认证和密钥 协商处理; The transceiver module is also configured to receive the reservation identification returned by the target base station, and send a handover response message to the first gateway, so that the first gateway sends a handover command to the UE for the UE. Open LTE access to the target base station, and perform authentication and key negotiation with the target base station;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述 UE发送的切换完成消息, 并向包交换网 关 S/PGW发送承载修改消息。 The transceiver module is also configured to receive the handover completion message sent by the UE, and send a bearer modification message to the packet switching gateway S/PGW.
31、 根据权利要求 30所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述收发模块还用于: 向所述目标基站发送携带所述预留标识的上下文建立消息, 以使所述目 标基站获取预留的资源; 31. The apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the transceiver module is further configured to: send a context establishment message carrying the reservation identifier to the target base station, so that the target base station obtains the reserved resource;
向所述 UE发送附着接受消息, 以完成网络切换。 Send an attachment accept message to the UE to complete network switching.
32、 一种切换的处理装置, 其特征在于, 包括: 32. A switching processing device, characterized in that it includes:
收发模块, 用于接收用户设备 UE发送的测量报告, 并根据所述测量报 告获取所述 UE最终接入的目标基站; A transceiver module, configured to receive a measurement report sent by the user equipment UE, and obtain the target base station that the UE finally accesses based on the measurement report;
所述收发模块还用于向移动管理实体 MME发送切换消息; The transceiver module is also used to send a handover message to the mobility management entity MME;
所述收发模块还用于接收所述 MME发送的切换应答消息, 并向所述 The transceiver module is also configured to receive the handover response message sent by the MME, and send the
UE发送切换命令, 以使所述 UE打开 LTE接入到所述目标基站, 以完成网 络切换。 The UE sends a handover command to enable the UE to open LTE access to the target base station to complete network switching.
PCT/CN2014/076379 2014-04-28 2014-04-28 Handover processing method and apparatus WO2015165006A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201480000689.6A CN105557024A (en) 2014-04-28 2014-04-28 Handover processing method and apparatus
PCT/CN2014/076379 WO2015165006A1 (en) 2014-04-28 2014-04-28 Handover processing method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2014/076379 WO2015165006A1 (en) 2014-04-28 2014-04-28 Handover processing method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015165006A1 true WO2015165006A1 (en) 2015-11-05

Family

ID=54357974

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2014/076379 WO2015165006A1 (en) 2014-04-28 2014-04-28 Handover processing method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN105557024A (en)
WO (1) WO2015165006A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108738053A (en) * 2018-05-21 2018-11-02 北京星网锐捷网络技术有限公司 The roaming detection method and device of terminal

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114650191B (en) * 2020-12-17 2024-07-05 深圳Tcl新技术有限公司 Off-network control method, intelligent gateway and computer readable storage medium

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101330713A (en) * 2007-06-19 2008-12-24 华为技术有限公司 Apparatus for coordinating guiding network, wireless network as well as method for switching and attaching user equipment
CN101841880A (en) * 2010-05-14 2010-09-22 华中科技大学 LTE and WLAN interconnecting system and switching method
CN101888617A (en) * 2009-05-14 2010-11-17 华为技术有限公司 Processing method and system of access point name constraint information and network element device and gateway device

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101128022B (en) * 2006-08-18 2011-02-02 华为技术有限公司 Terminal switching method and device and acquisition method and device for source access gateway address
CN101635966B (en) * 2008-07-22 2013-06-05 华为技术有限公司 Method, equipment and system for handover between radio access networks
CN103686859B (en) * 2012-09-17 2018-04-27 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of shunt method based on Multi net voting joint transmission, system and access network elements
CN103747494B (en) * 2013-12-31 2017-01-25 上海华为技术有限公司 Switching method and switching device in WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network)

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101330713A (en) * 2007-06-19 2008-12-24 华为技术有限公司 Apparatus for coordinating guiding network, wireless network as well as method for switching and attaching user equipment
CN101888617A (en) * 2009-05-14 2010-11-17 华为技术有限公司 Processing method and system of access point name constraint information and network element device and gateway device
CN101841880A (en) * 2010-05-14 2010-09-22 华中科技大学 LTE and WLAN interconnecting system and switching method

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108738053A (en) * 2018-05-21 2018-11-02 北京星网锐捷网络技术有限公司 The roaming detection method and device of terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN105557024A (en) 2016-05-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10728757B2 (en) Security implementation method, related apparatus, and system
CN111182543B (en) Method and device for switching network
CN109661829B (en) Techniques for handing off a connection between a wireless device and a local area network from a source access node to a target access node
EP3582531B1 (en) Network access authentication method based on non-3gpp network, and related device and system
US8549293B2 (en) Method of establishing fast security association for handover between heterogeneous radio access networks
JP6022596B2 (en) Method and device for authentication in an integrated wireless network
US11483705B2 (en) Method and device for generating access stratum key in communications system
CN107079361B (en) Handover to integrated ENode B/AP with context transfer
CN113709909B (en) Multi-connection communication method and equipment
WO2016155012A1 (en) Access method in wireless communication network, related device and system
CN108293183B (en) Handover between E-UTRAN and WLAN
WO2020029734A1 (en) User plane integrity protection method, apparatus and device
WO2009088252A2 (en) Pre-authentication method for inter-rat handover
CA3197006A1 (en) Key obtaining method and communication apparatus
WO2010130191A1 (en) Authentication method of switching access networks, system and device thereof
EP3314945B1 (en) Method for discovering handover capabilities of a mobile communication network, system for discovering handover capabilities of a mobile communication network, user equipment, program and computer program product
KR20230008697A (en) Prepare for non-3GPP handovers
WO2010130198A1 (en) Method, system and equipment for handover between access networks
WO2015165006A1 (en) Handover processing method and apparatus
KR102209289B1 (en) Security and information supporting method and system for proximity based service in mobile telecommunication system environment
WO2011000333A1 (en) Method, device and system for heterogeneous network intercommunication entity to choose object access network
CN101730040A (en) Method for cross-network switching session binding and WiMAX connection service network
WO2024145946A1 (en) Apparatus, method, and computer program
Bargh et al. UMTS-AKA and EAP-AKA inter-working for fast handovers in all-IP networks
CN104937984A (en) Method and device for device switching

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201480000689.6

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14891080

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14891080

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1